Rx100 Manual

Help Guide
Digital Still Camera

DSC-RX100M7
Use this manual if you encounter any problems, or have any questions about your product.
Looking for valuable information, such as essential points on shooting (Tutorials)
This website introduces convenient functions, ways of usage, and setting examples. Refer to the
website when you set up your camera. (Another window will open.)
DSC-RX100M7 accessories compatibility information
This website provides the accessories compatibility information. (Another window will open.)
Names of parts/Icons and indicators
Identifying parts
Basic operations
Using the control wheel
Using the control ring
Using MENU items
1
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
How to use the Quick Navi screen
How to use the keyboard
Icons and indicators
List of icons on the monitor
Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)
DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)
Preparing the camera
Checking the camera and the supplied items
Charging the battery pack
Inserting/removing the battery pack
Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the camera
Charging by connecting to a computer
Battery life and number of recordable images
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)
Notes on the battery pack
Notes on charging the battery pack
Inserting a memory card (sold separately)
Inserting/removing a memory card
Memory cards that can be used
Notes on memory card
Setting language, date and time
In-Camera Guide
Shooting
Shooting still images
Focusing
Focus Mode
Auto focus
Focus Area
2
Focus Area Limit
Phase detection AF
Focus Standard
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
AF/MF control
Face/Eye AF Set.
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Focus Frame Color
Pre-AF (still image)
AF Illuminator (still image)
AF Area Auto Clear
Disp. cont. AF area
Phase Detect. Area
Circ. of Focus Point
Manual focus
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Focus Magnifier
MF Assist (still image)
Focus Magnif. Time
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Peaking Setting
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)
Drive Mode
Cont. Shooting
Single Burst Shoot.
Single Burst Self-timer
Self-timer
3
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Indicator during bracket shooting
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
Bracket Settings
Taking pictures of yourself by monitoring the screen
Self-portrait/ -timer
Interval shooting
Interval Shoot Func.
Using touch functions
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
Touch Pad Settings
Selecting still image size/image quality
File Format (still image)
JPEG Quality (still image)
JPEG Image Size (still image)
Aspect Ratio (still image)
Panorama: Size
Panorama: Direction
Selecting a shooting mode
List of mode dial function
Intelligent Auto
Superior Auto
Switching the auto mode (Auto Mode)
4
About Scene Recognition
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Bulb shooting
Sweep Panorama
Scene Selection
Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
Movie: Exposure Mode
HFR (High Frame Rate): Exposure Mode
Controlling the exposure/metering modes
Exposure Comp.
Exposure Set. Guide
Metering Mode
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Spot Metering Point
AE lock
AEL w/ shutter (still image)
Exposure Std. Adjust
Zebra Setting
Correcting brightness and contrast automatically
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
Auto HDR
Selecting the ISO sensitivity
ISO Setting: ISO
ISO Setting: ISO Range Limit
ISO Setting: ISO AUTO Min. SS
Using the zoom
The zoom features available with this product
5
Zoom
Zoom Setting
About zoom scale
Zoom Speed
Smart Telecon.
Zoom Func. on Ring
White balance
White Balance
Priority Set in AWB
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
Shutter AWB Lock (still image)
Setting how to process images
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Soft Skin Effect (still image)
Auto Object Framing (still image)
Color Space (still image)
Shutter settings
Shutter Type (still image)
Using the electronic shutter
Displaying the release timing (Shoot. Timing Disp.)
Shoot. Start Disp.
Release w/o Card
Reducing blur
SteadyShot (still image)
Noise reduction
Long Exposure NR (still image)
High ISO NR (still image)
Face detection
Regist. Faces Priority
6
Smile Shutter
Face Registration (New Registration)
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)
Face Registration (Delete)
Using the flash
Using flash
Red Eye Reduction
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
Recording movies
Shooting movies
Movie w/ shutter
Movie recording formats
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)
Shooting super-slow-motion movies (HFR Settings)
Capturing still images while recording movies (Dual Rec)
Quality(Dual Rec)
Img. Size(Dual Rec)
Auto Dual Rec
Proxy Recording
Audio Recording
Audio Level Display
Audio Rec Level
Wind Noise Reduct.
Picture Profile
Gamma Disp. Assist
Auto Slow Shutter (movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
AF drive speed (movie)
7
AF Tracking Sens. (movie)
SteadyShot (movie)
TC/UB Settings
TC/UB Disp. Switch
MOVIE Button
Marker Display (movie)
Marker Settings (movie)
4K Output Select (movie)
Viewing
Viewing images
Playing back still images
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Rotating an image (Rotate)
Playing back panoramic images
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Playing back movies
Motion Shot Video
Motion Interval ADJ
Volume Settings
Photo Capture
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
Display as Group
Cont. PB for Interval
PB Speed for Interval
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Editing images
Beauty Effect
8
Protecting data
Protecting images (Protect)
Setting Rating function
Rating
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Designating images for printing (DPOF)
Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)
Deleting images
Deleting a displayed image
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Delete confirm.
Viewing images on a TV
Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable
Customizing the camera
Registering frequently used functions
Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
Customizing the functions of the dial
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Av/Tv Rotate
Wheel Lock
Customizing MENU (My Menu)
Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Display From My Menu
Checking images before/after recording
Auto Review
Live View Display
9
Monitor/viewfinder settings
Grid Line
FINDER/MONITOR
Monitor Brightness
Viewfinder Bright.
Finder Color Temp.
Function for VF close
Display Quality
Auto Monitor OFF
Bright Monitoring
Memory card settings
Format
File/Folder Settings (still image)
File Settings (movie)
Display Media Info.
Recover Image DB
Camera settings
Audio signals
Write Date (still image)
Tile Menu
Mode Dial Guide
Power Save Start Time
Auto Power OFF Temp.
NTSC/PAL Selector
HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution
HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60i compatible models)
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display
HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)
HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI
10
USB Connection
USB LUN Setting
USB Power Supply
PC Remote Settings: Still Img. Save Dest.
PC Remote Settings: RAW+J PC Save Img
Language
Date/Time Setup
Area Setting
Copyright Info
Version
Demo Mode
Initializing the camera
Setting Reset
Using network functions
Connecting this product and a Smartphone
Imaging Edge Mobile
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)
Transferring images to a Smartphone
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)
Sending images to a smartphone (NFC One-touch Sharing)
Reading location information from a smartphone
Location Info. Link Set.
Using a remote commander with Bluetooth communication
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
11
Transferring images to a TV
View on TV
Changing the network settings
Airplane Mode
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Settings: Disp MAC Address
Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset
Bluetooth Settings
Edit Device Name
Reset Network Set.
Using a computer
Recommended computer environment
Importing images for use on a computer
PlayMemories Home
Installing PlayMemories Home
Connecting to a computer
Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home
Disconnecting the camera from the computer
Transferring images to a computer
Send to Computer
Developing RAW images/Remote shooting (Imaging Edge)
Imaging Edge
Creating a movie disc
Selecting a disc to be created
Creating Blu-ray Discs from high-definition image quality movies
Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from high-definition image quality movies
Creating DVD discs from standard image quality movies
List of MENU items
Using MENU items
12
Camera Settings1
Panorama: Size
Panorama: Direction
Scene Selection
Drive Mode
Bracket Settings
Focus Mode
Focus Area
Focus Area Limit
Face/Eye AF Set.
Focus Frame Color
AF Area Auto Clear
Disp. cont. AF area
13
Phase Detect. Area
Exposure Comp.
ISO Setting: ISO
Metering Mode
Spot Metering Point
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
Red Eye Reduction
White Balance
Priority Set in AWB
Auto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Picture Profile
Focus Magnifier
Focus Magnif. Time
Peaking Setting
14
Smile Shutter
Camera Settings2
File Format (movie)
Quality(Dual Rec)
Img. Size(Dual Rec)
Auto Dual Rec
Proxy Recording
Audio Recording
Audio Rec Level
Audio Level Display
Wind Noise Reduct.
SteadyShot (movie)
Movie w/ shutter
Release w/o Card
15
Zoom Setting
Zoom Speed
Zoom Func. on Ring
FINDER/MONITOR
Zebra Setting
Grid Line
Exposure Set. Guide
Live View Display
Shoot. Start Disp.
Auto Review
Av/Tv Rotate
MOVIE Button
Wheel Lock
Audio signals
Network
Send to Computer
View on TV
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Airplane Mode
16
Bluetooth Settings
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
Edit Device Name
Reset Network Set.
Playback
Rating
Beauty Effect
Photo Capture
Motion Interval ADJ
Display as Group
Setup
17
Monitor Brightness
Viewfinder Bright.
Finder Color Temp.
Gamma Disp. Assist
Volume Settings
Tile Menu
Mode Dial Guide
Delete confirm.
Display Quality
Auto Monitor OFF
NTSC/PAL Selector
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Pad Settings
Demo Mode
TC/UB Settings
USB Connection
USB LUN Setting
USB Power Supply
18
Language
Date/Time Setup
Area Setting
Copyright Info
Format
Recover Image DB
Display Media Info.
Version
Setting Reset
My Menu
Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Precautions/This product
Precautions
On cleaning
Number of recordable images
Recordable movie times
Using the AC Adaptor/battery charger abroad
AVCHD format
License
Specifications
Trademarks
If you have problems

19
Troubleshooting
Self-diagnosis display
Warning messages
5-007-204-11(1) Copyright 2019 Sony Corporation
20
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Identifying parts
1. ON/OFF (Power) button

2. Power/Charge lamp
3. Shutter button
4. Mode dial
(Auto Mode)/P(Program Auto)/A(Aperture Priority)/S(Shutter Priority)/M(Manual Exposure)/MR(Memory
recall)/ (Movie)/ HFR(High Frame Rate)/ (Sweep Panorama)/SCN(Scene Selection)
5. For shooting: W/T (zoom) lever
For viewing: (Index) lever/Playback zoom lever
6. Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator
7. Flash
Do not cover the flash with your finger.
When using the flash, slide the (Flash pop-up) switch. If not using the flash, press it down manually.
8. Diopter-adjustment lever
Adjust the diopter-adjustment lever according to your eyesight until the display appears clearly in the viewfinder.
9. Viewfinder
When you look into the viewfinder, the viewfinder mode is activated, and when you take your face away from the
viewfinder, the viewing mode returns to the monitor mode.
10. Internal microphone

Do not cover this part during movie recording. Doing so may cause noise or lower the volume.
11. Viewfinder pop-up switch

12. Hook for strap
Attach the wrist strap and place your hand through the loop to prevent damage caused by dropping the product.
21
To use a shoulder strap (sold separately), attach the strap adaptors (supplied) to the strap hooks on either side of
the camera.
13. (N-Mark)
This mark indicates the touch point for connecting the camera and an NFC-enabled Smartphone.
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of the short-range wireless communication
technology.
14. Control ring

15. Lens
22
16. Eye sensor
17. (Flash pop-up) switch
18. Monitor
(For touch operation: Touch panel/Touch pad)
You can adjust the monitor to an easily viewable angle and shoot from any position.
You may not be able to adjust the monitor angle depending on the type of a tripod you use. In such a case,
release the tripod screw once to adjust the monitor angle.
19. For shooting: Fn (Function) button

For viewing: (Send to Smartphone) button
20. MOVIE (Movie) button
21. (Microphone) jack
When an external microphone is connected, the built-in microphone turns off automatically. When the external
microphone is a plugin-power type, the power of the microphone is supplied by the camera.
22. Multi/Micro USB Terminal

This terminal supports Micro USB-compatible devices.
For details on compatible accessories for the Multi/Micro USB Terminal, visit the Sony website, or consult your
Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
23. HDMI micro jack

24. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth antenna (built-in)
25. MENU button
26. Control wheel
27. Center button
28. (Playback) button
29. C/ (Custom/Delete) button
23
30. Battery insertion slot
31. Battery lock lever
32. Tripod socket hole
Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you cannot firmly secure the camera,
and damage to the camera may occur.
33. Access lamp

34. Memory card slot
35. Battery/Memory card cover
36. Speaker
When using the viewfinder

1. Slide down the viewfinder pop-up switch.
If you slide the viewfinder pop-up switch when the power is off, the camera turns on.
To choose whether or not to turn the camera off when the viewfinder is stowed, select MENU → (Setup) →
[Function for VF close].
2. Adjust the diopter-adjustment lever to your eyesight until the display appears clearly in the viewfinder.
To store the viewfinder

Push down the top of the viewfinder.
24
Note
Be careful not to push down on the viewfinder when it is being raised.
Be sure to push the viewfinder down slowly so that the eyepiece part does not get stuck.
25
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can select setting items by turning or pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. Your selection is
determined when you press the center of the control wheel.
The DISP (Display Setting), (Exposure Comp.), / (Drive Mode), and (Flash Mode) functions are
assigned to the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. In addition, you can assign selected functions to the
left/right side and the center of the control wheel.
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel.
Related Topic
Focus Standard
26
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
By turning the control ring (A), you can change the desired settings instantly for various shooting modes.
You can also allocate frequently used functions to the control ring by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [
Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → [Control Ring]. You can also assign the desired functions to the ring by setting
“My Dial” from MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [My Dial Settings].
Icons and function names are displayed on the screen as follows.

Ex.
: Adjust zoom by turning the control ring.
Related Topic
27
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Using MENU items
You can change settings related to all the camera operations including shooting, playback, and operating method. You
can also execute camera functions from the MENU.
1 Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.
2 Select the desired setting you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.
Select a MENU tab (A) at the top of the screen, and press the left/right side of the control wheel to move to
another MENU tab.
You can move to the next MENU tab by pressing the Fn button.
You can go back to the previous screen by pressing the MENU button.
3 Select the desired setting value, and press the center to confirm your selection.
Related Topic
Tile Menu
Add Item
28
29
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable keys. This lets
you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly. You can also assign
[Not set] to easily operable keys to prevent accidental operation.
You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode ( Custom Key), movie
shooting mode ( Custom Key), and playback mode ( Custom Key).
Assignable functions vary depending on the keys.
You can assign functions to the following keys.
1. Control Ring
2. Fn/ Button
3. Center Button /Left Button/Right Button
4. C Button
Hint
You can recall functions more quickly by using the Function menu to configure each setting directly from the Fn button, along with
the custom keys. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
The following is the procedure for assigning the [Eye AF] function to the C button.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key].
If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [ Custom Key]. If you want to assign
a function to recall while playing back images, select [ Custom Key].
2 Move to the [Rear] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [C Button] and press
the center of the control wheel.
30
3 Press the left/right side of the control wheel until [Eye AF] is displayed. Select [Eye AF], and then press the
center.
If you press the C button in the still image shooting mode and eyes are detected, [Eye AF] will activate, and the
camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the C button.
Note
If you assign [Follow Custom ( )] to a custom key using [ Custom Key], but the function is one that is unavailable in the
movie shooting mode such as [ JPEG Quality] or [Flash Mode], the function will not be recalled when you press the key in the
movie shooting mode.
If you assign [Follow Custom ( / )] to a custom key using [ Custom Key], the camera will switch to the shooting mode
and recall the assigned function when you press the key in the playback mode.
Related Topic
31
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn
(Function) button in the shooting mode. You can access frequently used functions more quickly by registering them to
the function menu.
Hint
You can register twelve functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.
You can recall functions more quickly by using the custom key function to assign frequently used functions to desired keys, along
with the function menu. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
1 Press the DISP on the control wheel repeatedly to display a screen mode other than [For viewfinder], and
then press the Fn (Function) button.
2 Select the desired function by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
32
3 Select the desired setting by turning the control wheel or the control ring, and press the center of the
control wheel.
To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

Select the desired function in step 2, then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for the
function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.
To change the functions in the function menu (Function Menu Set.)

The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the still image function menu to [Grid Line].
To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Function Menu Set.].

2. Select (Drive Mode) from among the twelve still image function menu items using the top/bottom/left/right
side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
3. Move to the [Display/Auto Review] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [Grid Line] and
press the center of the control wheel.
(Grid Line) will be displayed in the former location of (Drive Mode) in the function menu.
Related Topic
33
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
How to use the Quick Navi screen
The Quick Navi screen is a function optimized for shooting with the viewfinder, that lets you control settings directly.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor].
2 Place a mark on [For viewfinder] and then select [Enter].
3 Press the DISP on the control wheel to set the screen mode to [For viewfinder].
4 Press the Fn button to switch to the Quick Navi screen.
The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual
displays.
Auto mode/Scene Selection mode
P/A/S/M/Sweep Panorama mode
6 Turn the control wheel to select the desired setting.

34
Note
Items that are gray on the Quick Navi screen are not adjustable.
When using [Creative Style], [Picture Profile], etc., some of the setup tasks can only be accomplished on a dedicated screen.
Related Topic
35
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen.
Move the cursor on desired key using the control wheel, then press the center to enter.
1. Input box
The characters you entered are displayed.
2. Switch character types
Each time you press this key, the character type will switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.
3. Keyboard
Each time you press this key, the characters corresponding to that key will be displayed one-by-one in order.
For example: If you want to enter “abd”
Press the key for “abc” once to display “a” → select “ ”((5) Move cursor) and press the key for “abc” twice to
display “b” → press the key for “def” once to display “d.”
4. Finalize
Finalizes the entered characters.
5. Move cursor
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right or left.
6. Delete
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.
7.
Switches the next character to a capital or lowercase letter.
8.
Enters a space.
To cancel input, select [Cancel].
36
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
List of icons on the monitor
The displayed contents and their positions shown below are just a guideline, and may differ from the actual display.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.
Icons on the shooting screen
Monitor mode
Viewfinder mode
1. Shooting mode/Scene recognition

P P* A S M
Shooting mode
Register number
Scene Recognition icons
Scene Selection
2. Camera settings
NO CARD
Memory card status
100/1 h 30 m
Remaining number of recordable images/Recordable time of movies
Writing data / Number of images left to write

CAPTURE
Capturing still image
37
Unable to shoot still images
Auto Dual Rec
Aspect ratio of still images

20M / 18M / 17M / 13M / 10M / 7.5M / 6.5M / 5.0M / 4.2M / 3.7M / VGA
Image size of still images

RAW
RAW recording
X.FINE FINE STD
JPEG Quality
XAVC S 4K XAVC S HD AVCHD
File format of movies
Record setting of movies

120p 100p 60p 50p 60i 50i 30p 25p 24p
Frame rate of movies
Proxy Recording
240fps 250fps 480fps 500fps 960fps 1000fps
Frame rate for HFR shooting
Flash charge in progress
Setting Effect OFF
AF Illuminator
SteadyShot off/on, Camera shake warning
Smart Zoom/ Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

×2.0
Smart Telecon.
PC Remote
Bright Monitoring
Overlay icon
No audio recording of movies
Remote control
Wind Noise Reduct.
Copyright information writing on
REC Timing
Gamma Disp. Assist
38
Touch Shutter
Focus Cancel
Tracking Cancel
Spot Focus
Performing [Spot Focus]
NFC active
Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable
Connected to smartphone / Not connected to smartphone
Obtaining location information / Location information cannot be obtained
Airplane Mode
Overheating warning
20 sec
Remaining recordable time when overheating warning is displayed
Database file full / Database file error

3. Battery
Remaining battery
Remaining battery warning
USB power supply

4. Shooting settings
Drive Mode
Flash Mode /Red Eye Reduction

±0.0
Flash Comp.
Focus Mode
Focus Area
JPEG RAW RAW+J
File Format
Metering Mode
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)
D-Range Optimizer /Auto HDR

+3 +3 +3
Creative Style /Contrast, saturation, and sharpness
39
Smile detection sensitivity indicator
Picture Effect
Face/Eye Priority in AF
–
Picture Profile
Shutter Type
5. Focus indicator/exposure settings
Focus indicator
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value
Exposure compensation/Metered Manual

ISO400
ISO AUTO
ISO400
ISO sensitivity
AE lock/AWB lock
6. Guides/other
Tracking Cancel
Guide display for tracking
Select Focus Point On/Off
Guide display for setting Focus Area
Focus Cancel
Guide display for canceling focusing
Return to Shooting Setting
Guide display for HFR shooting
Switch Av/Tv
Guide display for switching aperture value and shutter speed
Guide display for My Dial
Control ring function
Control wheel function
Bracket indicator
Spot metering area

40
C:32:00
Exposure Setting Guide
Shutter speed indicator
Aperture indicator
Histogram
Digital level gauge

STBY REC
Movie recording standby/Movie recording in progress
1:00:12
Actual movie recording time (hours: minutes: seconds)
Audio Level Display
REC Control
00:00:00:00
Time code (hours: minutes: seconds: frames)
00 00 00 00
User Bit
Icons on the playback screen
Single-image playback
Histogram display
1. Basic information
View Mode
41
Rating
Protect
DPOF
DPOF set
Auto object framing image

3/7
File number/Number of images in the view mode
NFC active
Remaining battery
Display as Group
Proxy movie included

2. Camera settings
Refer to “Icons on the shooting screen.”
3. Shooting settings
Picture Effect error
Auto HDR error

HLG
HDR recording (Hybrid Log-Gamma)
Refer to “Icons on the shooting screen” for other icons displayed in this area.
4. Image information
Latitude/longitude information
Copyright information exists for image

2019-1-1 10:37PM
Date of recording
100-0003
Folder number - file number
C0003
Movie file number
Histogram (Luminance/R/G/B)
42
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can change the display contents on the screen.
1 Press the DISP (Display Setting) button.
To switch the information displayed on the viewfinder, press the DISP button while looking into the viewfinder.
Each time you press the DISP button, the screen display changes.
The displayed contents and their position are just a guideline, and may differ from the actual display.
During shooting (Monitor)

Display All Info. → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level → For viewfinder → Display All Info.
During shooting (Viewfinder)

Level → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level
During playback (Monitor/Viewfinder)

Display Info. → Histogram → No Disp. Info. → Display Info.
43
If the image has an overexposed or underexposed area, the corresponding section will blink on the histogram
display (overexposed/underexposed warning).
The settings for playback are also applied in [Auto Review].
Histogram display
A histogram shows the luminance distribution, displaying how many pixels there are by luminance. It shows darker
toward the left and brighter toward the right.
The histogram changes depending on the exposure compensation.
A peak at the right or left end of the histogram indicates that the image has an overexposed or underexposed area,
respectively. You cannot correct such defects using a computer after shooting. Perform exposure compensation before
shooting as necessary.
(A): Pixel count

(B): Brightness
Note
The viewfinder display and the monitor display for shooting can be set separately. Look through the viewfinder to set the display
settings for the viewfinder.
[Histogram] is not displayed during panorama shooting.
The information in the histogram display does not indicate the final photograph. It is information about image displayed on the
screen. The final result depends on the aperture value, etc.
The histogram display is extremely different between shooting and playback in the following cases:
When the flash is used
When shooting a low luminance subject such as a night scene
In movie mode, [For viewfinder] cannot be displayed.
Hint
The following are not displayed in the default settings.
Graphic Display
Monitor Off
Display All Info. (when using the viewfinder)
To change the display modes that are switched when you press the DISP button, select MENU → (Camera Settings2) →
[DISP Button] and change the setting.
44
Related Topic
45
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] or [Finder] → desired setting → [Enter].
The items marked with are available.
Menu item details

Graphic Display :
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information.
Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in
either direction, the indicator turns to green.
For viewfinder*:
Displays only shooting information on the monitor, not the subject. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the
viewfinder.
Monitor Off*:
Always turns the monitor off when shooting images. You can use the monitor when playing back images or operating
MENU. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the viewfinder.
* These screen modes are available only in the setting for [Monitor].
Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.
The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.
46
Related Topic
47
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Checking the camera and the supplied items
The number in parentheses indicates the number of pieces.
Camera (1)
AC Adaptor (1)
The type of the AC Adaptor may differ depending on the country/region.
NP-BX1 Rechargeable Battery Pack (1)
Micro USB cable (1)
Wrist strap (1)
Strap adaptor (2)
Startup Guide (1)

Reference Guide (1)
48
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Inserting/removing the battery pack
1 Open the battery/memory card cover.
2 Insert the battery pack while pressing the lock lever (A) with the tip of the battery until the battery locks into
place.
3 Close the cover.
To remove the battery pack

Make sure that the access lamp is not lit, and turn off the camera. Then, slide the lock lever (A) and remove the battery
pack. Be careful not to drop the battery pack.
49
50
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the camera
1 Turn the power off.
2 Connect the camera with the battery pack inserted to the AC Adaptor (supplied) using the micro USB cable
(supplied), and connect the AC Adaptor to the wall outlet (wall socket).
Charge lamp on the camera (orange)

Lit: Charging
Off: Charging finished
Flashing: Charging error or charging paused temporarily because the camera is not within the proper temperature
range
Charging time (Full charge): The charging time is approximately 150 min.
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25 °C (77 °F).
Charging may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.
The charge lamp turns off when charging is completed.
If the charge lamp lights up and then immediately turns off, the battery pack is fully charged.
Note
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove the battery pack or disconnect the USB cable from
the camera and then re-insert it to recharge.
If the charge lamp on the camera flashes when the AC Adaptor is connected to the wall outlet (wall socket), this indicates that
charging is temporarily stopped because the temperature is outside the recommended range. When the temperature gets back
within the appropriate range, the charging resumes. We recommend charging the battery pack at an ambient temperature of
between 10°C to 30°C (50ºF to 86ºF).
Use a nearby wall outlet (wall socket) when using the AC Adaptor/Battery Charger. If any malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug
from the wall outlet (wall socket) immediately to disconnect from the power source.
If you use the product with a charge lamp, note that the product is not disconnected from the power source even when the lamp
turns off.
If you turn on the camera, power will be supplied from the wall outlet (wall socket) and you will be able to operate the camera.
However, the battery pack will not be charged.
When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has not been used for a long time, the charge lamp may flash
quickly when the battery is charged. If this happens, remove the battery pack or disconnect the USB cable from the camera and
then re-insert it to recharge.
51
Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is already fully charged or close to fully charged.
Doing so may cause a deterioration in battery performance.
When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall socket).
Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs, USB cables (supplied) and AC Adaptors (supplied).
Related Topic
52
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Charging by connecting to a computer
The battery pack can be charged by connecting the camera to a computer using a micro USB cable.
1 Turn off the product, and connect to the USB terminal of the computer.
Note
If the product is connected to a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop battery level decreases. Do
not leave the product connected to a laptop computer for an extended period of time.
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.
Proper operation cannot be guaranteed on all types of computers.
Charging cannot be guaranteed with a custom-built computer, modified computer, or a computer connected through a USB hub.
The camera may not operate correctly when other USB devices are used at the same time.
Related Topic
53
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Battery life Number of images
Approx. 260
Screen mode —
Shooting (still images) Approx. 310 (Auto Monitor OFF (2 Sec))
Viewfinder mode — Approx. 240
Screen mode Approx. 40 min. —

Actual shooting (movies)
Viewfinder mode Approx. 40 min. —
Screen mode Approx. 70 min. —

Continuous shooting (movies)
Viewfinder mode Approx. 70 min. —
The above estimates for battery life and number of recordable images apply when the battery pack has been fully
charged. The battery life and number of images may decrease depending on the conditions of use.
The battery life and number of recordable images are estimates based on shooting with the default settings under the
following conditions:
Using the battery pack at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).
Using a Sony SDXC memory card (U3) (sold separately)
The numbers for “Shooting (still images)” are based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following
conditions:
(CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products Association)
One picture is taken every 30 seconds.
The power is turned on and off once every ten times.
The flash strobes once for every two pictures.
The zoom is switched alternately between the W and T ends.
The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following
conditions:
The image quality is set to XAVC S HD 60p 50M /50p 50M.
Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting, zooming, shooting stand-by, turning on/off, etc.
Continuous shooting (movies): No operations other than starting and ending shooting are performed.
54
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Use the supplied AC adaptor to shoot and play back images while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). This
conserves the camera's battery power.
1 Insert the battery pack into the camera.
2 Connect the camera to the wall outlet (wall socket) with a micro USB cable (supplied) and an AC adaptor
(supplied).
Note
The camera will not activate if there is no remaining battery. Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.
If you use the camera while power is being supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket), make sure that the icon that shows that
powering via USB is in progress ( ) is displayed on the monitor.
Do not remove the battery pack while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). If you remove the battery pack, the
camera will be turned off.
Do not remove the battery pack while the access lamp is lit. The data in the memory card may be damaged.
As long as the power is on, the battery pack will not be charged even if the camera is connected to the AC Adaptor.
Under certain conditions, power may be supplied from the battery pack supplementarily even if you are using the AC adaptor.
Do not remove the Micro USB cable while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). Before you remove the Micro USB
cable, turn off the camera.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the continuous recording time may be shortened while power is supplied from
a wall outlet (wall socket).
When using a mobile charger as a power source, confirm that it is fully charged before use. Also, be careful of the remaining
power on the mobile charger during use.
55
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Notes on using the battery pack
Be sure to use only battery packs specified for this product.

The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Do not leave the battery pack in extremely hot places, such as in a car or under direct sunlight.
Charging the battery pack
Charge the battery pack (supplied) before using the product for the first time.
The charged battery pack will discharge little by little even if you do not use it. Charge the battery pack each time
before you use the product so that you do not miss any opportunities to shoot images.
Do not charge battery packs except battery packs specified for this product. Doing so can result in leaks,
overheating, explosions, electric shocks, burns, or injuries.
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove the battery pack or disconnect the USB
cable from the camera and then reinsert it to recharge.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F).
The battery pack may not be effectively charged in temperatures outside this range.
When you connect this product and a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop’s battery
charge may decrease. Do not charge this product using the laptop computer for too long.
Do not turn on/restart a computer, wake a computer from sleep mode, or turn off a computer while this product is
connected to the computer via USB cable. Doing so may cause a malfunction of this product. Disconnect the product
and the computer before performing the above operations.
We do not guarantee charging if you are using a self-built or modified computer.
When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall socket) or disconnect the USB cable
from the camera. Not doing so may result in a shorter battery life.
Remaining battery indicator
The remaining battery indicator appears on the screen.
A: Battery level high

B: Battery exhausted
It takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery indicator to appear.
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
If you do not operate the product for a certain period of time while the power is on, the product turns off automatically
(Auto power-off function).
If the remaining battery indicator does not appear on the screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button to display it.
Charging time (Full charge)
The charging time is approximately 150 minutes using the AC adaptor (supplied).
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25 °C (77 °F). Charging
may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.
Effective use of the battery pack

56
Battery performance decreases in low temperature environments. So in cold places, the operational time of the
battery pack is shorter. To ensure longer battery pack use, we recommend putting the battery pack in your pocket
close to your body to warm it up, and insert it in the product immediately before you start shooting. If there are any
metal objects such as keys in your pocket, be careful of causing a short-circuit.
The battery pack will run down quickly if you use the flash or continuous shooting function frequently, turn the power
on/off frequently, or set the monitor very bright.
We recommend preparing spare battery packs and taking trial shots before taking the actual shots.
If the battery terminal is dirty, you may not be able to turn on the product or the battery pack may not be properly
charged. In that case, clean the battery by lightly wiping off any dust using a soft cloth or a cotton swab.
How to store the battery pack
To maintain the battery pack’s function, charge the battery pack and then fully discharge it in the camera at least once a
year before storing it. Store the battery in a cool, dry place after removing it from the camera.
On battery life
The battery life is limited. If you use the same battery repeatedly, or use the same battery for a long period, the
battery capacity decreases gradually. If the available time of the battery is shortened significantly, it is probably time
to replace the battery pack with a new one.
The battery life varies according to how the battery pack is stored and the operating conditions and environment in
which each battery pack is used.
57
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The supplied AC Adaptor is dedicated to this product. Do not connect with other electronic devices. Doing so may
cause a malfunction.
Make sure to use a genuine Sony AC Adaptor.
If the product's charge lamp flashes while charging, remove the battery pack being charged, and then insert the
same battery pack firmly back into the product. If the charge lamp flashes again, this may indicate a faulty battery or
that a battery pack other than the specified type has been inserted. Check that the battery pack is the specified type.
If the battery pack is the specified type, remove the battery pack, replace it with a new or different one and check that
the newly inserted battery is charging correctly. If the newly inserted battery is charging correctly, the previously
inserted battery may be faulty.
If the charge lamp flashes even if the AC Adaptor is connected to the product and the wall outlet (wall socket), this
indicates that charging has stopped temporarily and is on standby. Charging stops and enters standby status
automatically when the temperature is outside of the recommended operating temperature. When the temperature
returns to the appropriate range, charging resumes and the charge lamp lights up again. We recommend charging
the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F).
58
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Inserting/removing a memory card
Explains how to insert a memory card (sold separately) to the product.
1 Open the battery/memory card cover.
2 Insert the memory card.
With the notched corner facing in the direction illustrated, insert the memory card until it clicks into place. Insert
the memory card correctly. Not doing so may cause a malfunction.
3 Close the cover.
Hint
When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is recommended that you format the card on the camera for
more stable performance of the memory card.
59
To remove the memory card
Open the memory card cover and make sure that the access lamp (A) is not lit, then push in the memory card lightly
once to remove it.
Related Topic
Format
60
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When using microSD memory cards or Memory Stick Micro media with this camera, be sure to use the appropriate
adaptor.
SD memory cards
Recording format Supported memory card
Still image SD/SDHC/SDXC card
AVCHD SD/SDHC/SDXC card (Class 4 or faster, or U1 or faster)
4K 60Mbps*
HD 50Mbps or lower* SDHC/SDXC card (Class 10, or U1 or faster)
HD 60Mbps
XAVC S
4K 100Mbps*
SDHC/SDXC card (U3)
HD 100Mbps
High Frame Rate* SDHC/SDXC card (Class 10, or U1 or faster)
* Including when recording proxy movies at the same time
Memory Stick media
Recording format Supported memory card
Still image Memory Stick PRO Duo/ Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo
AVCHD Memory Stick PRO Duo (Mark 2)/ Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo
4K 60Mbps*
HD 50Mbps or lower* Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo
HD 60Mbps
XAVC S
4K 100Mbps*
—
HD 100Mbps
High Frame Rate* Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo
* Including when recording proxy movies at the same time
Note
When an SDHC memory card is used to record an XAVC S movie over extended periods of time, the recorded movies will be
divided into files 4 GB in size. The divided files can be handled as a single file by importing them to a computer using
PlayMemories Home.
Fully charge the battery pack before attempting to recover the database files on the memory card.
Related Topic
61
62
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
If you repeatedly shoot and delete images for a long time, fragmentation of data in a file in the memory card may
occur, and movie recording may be interrupted in the middle of shooting. If this happens, save your images to a
computer or other storage location, then execute [Format] using this camera.
Do not remove the battery pack or the memory card, disconnect the USB cable, or turn the camera off while the
access lamp is lit up. This may cause the data on the memory card to become damaged.
Be sure to back up the data for protection.
Not all memory cards are guaranteed to operate correctly.
Images recorded on an SDXC memory card cannot be imported to or played on computers or AV devices that are
not compatible with exFAT when connected using a USB cable. Make sure that the device is compatible with exFAT
before connecting it to the camera. If you connect your camera to an incompatible device, you may be prompted to
format the card. Never format the card in response to this prompt, as doing so will erase all data on the card. (exFAT
is the file system used on SDXC memory cards.)
Do not expose the memory card to water.
Do not strike, bend or drop the memory card.
Do not use or store the memory card under the following conditions:
High temperature locations such as in a car parked under the sun
Locations exposed to direct sunlight
Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances present
If the memory card is used near areas with strong magnetization, or used in locations subject to static electricity or
electrical noise, the data on the memory card may become damaged.
Do not touch the terminal section of the memory card with your hand or a metal object.
Do not leave the memory card within the reach of small children. They might accidentally swallow it.
Do not disassemble or modify the memory card.
The memory card may be hot just after it has been used for a long time. Be careful when you handle it.
Memory card formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with the product. Format the memory card
using this product.
Data read/write speeds differ depending on the combination of the memory card and the equipment used.
Do not press down hard when writing in the memo space on the memory card.
Do not attach a label on the memory card itself nor on a memory card adaptor.
If the write-protect switch or delete-protect switch of a memory card is set to the LOCK position, you cannot record or
delete images. In this case, set the switch to the record position.
To use a Memory Stick Micro media or microSD memory card with this product:
Be sure to insert the memory card into a dedicated adaptor. If you insert a memory card into the product without a
memory card adaptor, you might not be able to remove it from the product.
When inserting a memory card into a memory card adaptor, be sure that the memory card is inserted in the
correct direction and then insert it as far as it will go. If the card is not inserted properly, it may result in a
malfunction.
About Memory Stick PRO Duo media and Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo media:
This Memory Stick is equipped with MagicGate function. MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses
encryption technology.
Data recording/playback that requires MagicGate functions cannot be performed with this product.
High-speed data transfer using a parallel interface is supported.
63
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Setting language, date and time
The setting screen for language, date and time is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time,
initialize this product or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has discharged.
1 Turn on the camera.
The language setting screen will appear and then setting screen for date and time will appear.
2 Select your language, and then press the center of the control wheel.
3 Check that [Enter] is selected on the screen, then press the center.
4 Select your desired geographic location, and then press the center.
5 Select a setting item using the top/bottom side of the control wheel or by turning the control wheel, then
press the center.
6 Set [Daylight Savings], [Date/Time], and [Date Format] using the top/bottom/left/right sides, then press the
center.
Midnight is indicated as 12:00 AM, and noon as 12:00 PM when you set [Date/Time].
Change the values using the top/bottom when you set [Date/Time].
7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to set other items, then select [Enter] and press the center.
On maintaining the date and time

This camera has an internal rechargeable battery for maintaining the date and time and other settings regardless of
whether the power is on or off, or whether the battery pack is charged or discharged.
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack into the camera, and leave the product
for 24 hours or more with the power off.
If the clock resets every time the battery pack is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out.
Consult your service facility.
Hint
To set the date and time or geographic location again after the date and time setting is finished, select MENU → (Setup) →
[Date/Time Setup] or [Area Setting].
Note
If the date and time setting is canceled halfway, the setting screen for the date and time appears every time you turn on the
camera.
Related Topic
Date/Time Setup
64
Area Setting
65
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
In-Camera Guide
The [In-Camera Guide] displays descriptions of MENU items, Fn (Function) items, and settings.
1 Select the MENU or Fn item for which you want to see a description, and then press the (Delete) button
(A).
The descriptions of the item are displayed.
66
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Shooting still images
1 Select the desired shooting mode by turning the mode dial.
2 Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera. Or look through the viewfinder and hold the camera.
3 Enlarge images with the W/T (zoom) lever when shooting.
4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
When the image is in focus, a beep sounds and the indicator (such as ) lights up.
The shortest shooting distance is approximately 8 cm (0.27 ft.) (W), 100 cm (3.29 ft.) (T) (from the lens).
67
5 Press the shutter button fully down.
To shoot images with the focus locked on the desired subject (Focus-lock)
Shoots images with the focus locked on the desired subject in auto focus mode.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [Single-shot AF] or [Automatic AF].

2. Place the subject within the AF area and press the shutter button halfway down.
The focus is locked.
If it is difficult to focus on the desired subject, set [Focus Area] to [Center] or [Flexible Spot].
3. Keep pressing the shutter button halfway down, and place the subject back in the original position to re-compose the
shot.
4. Press the shutter button down fully to take the picture.

Hint
When the product cannot focus automatically, the focus indicator flashes and the beep does not sound. Either recompose the
shot or change the focus setting. In [Continuous AF] mode, lights up and the beep indicating that the focus has been
achieved does not sound.
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed.
Note
When the subject is moving, you cannot lock the focus even if [Focus Mode] has been set to [Automatic AF].
Related Topic
Auto Review
Focus Mode
68
Focus Area
69
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Mode
Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

(Single-shot AF):
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
(Automatic AF):
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject. When the shutter button is
pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to
focus when the subject is in motion. During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with Continuous AF
from the second shot.
(Continuous AF):
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is
in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.
(DMF):
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
(Manual Focus):
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use manual focus.
Rotate the control ring to adjust the focus manually in the direct manual focus mode or manual focus mode.
Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.
Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus

Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
Back-lit subjects
Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances
Hint
When you set the focus to infinity in the manual focus mode or the direct manual focus mode, make sure that the focus is on a
sufficiently distant subject by checking the monitor or the viewfinder.
70
Note
Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available when shooting movies or when the mode dial is set to .
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Phase detection AF
71
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Area
Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to focus properly in the auto focus mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Wide :
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway
down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.
Zone :
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
Center :
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the
composition you want.
Flexible Spot :
Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a
narrow area.
On the Flexible Spot shooting screen, you can change the size of the focusing frame by turning the control wheel.
Expand Flexible Spot :
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority
area for focusing.
Tracking:
When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus
area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to [Continuous AF]. Point the cursor at [Tracking] on the
[Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control
wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or
expand flexible spot. On the Flexible Spot shooting screen, you can change the size of the focusing frame by turning the
control wheel.
To move the focus area

When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], if pressing the button to which [Focus
Standard] is assigned, you can shoot while moving the focusing frame using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the
control wheel. To return the focusing frame to the center of the monitor, press the button while moving the frame.
To change the shooting settings using the control wheel, press the button to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.
You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On],
and set [Func. of Touch Operation] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.
To track the subject temporarily (Tracking On)

You can temporarily change the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking] while you press and hold down the custom key to
which you have assigned [Tracking On] in advance. The [Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On] will
switch to the equivalent [Tracking] setting.
For example:
[Focus Area] before you activate [Tracking On] [Focus Area] while [Tracking On] is active
[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]
72
[Flexible Spot: S] [Tracking: Flexible Spot S]
[Expand Flexible Spot] [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
Note
[Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
During Smile Shutter mode
The mode dial is set to (Movie) and [Auto Dual Rec] is set to [On].
The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.
When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or or during movie shooting, [Tracking] cannot be selected as the [Focus Area].
When [Subject Detection] for [Face/Eye AF Set.] is set to [Animal], [Tracking] cannot be selected as the [Focus Area].
You cannot execute functions assigned to the control wheel or the C button while moving the focusing frame.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
73
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Area Limit
By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [Focus Area].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas that you
want to use, and then select [OK].
The types of focus areas marked with will be available as settings.
Note
Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,
add a check mark using [Focus Area Limit].
If you remove the check mark for a focus area registered with [ Switch V/H AF Area] or [ AF Area Registration], the
registered settings will change.
Related Topic
Focus Area
74
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Phase detection AF
When there are phase detection AF points within the auto focus area, the product uses the combined autofocus of the
phase detection AF and contrast AF.
Note
When the F-value is greater than F8, you cannot use the Phase Detection AF. Only Contrast AF is available.
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p], Phase Detection AF cannot be
used. Only Contrast AF is available.
75
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Standard
If you assign [Focus Standard] to the desired custom key, you can recall useful functions such as moving the focusing
frame quickly, etc., depending on the focus area settings.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign the [Focus Standard]
function to the key.
To use the [Focus Standard] function while shooting movies, select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [
Custom Key] → the desired button, and then assign [Focus Standard] to the key.
2 Press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.
What you can do by pressing the key varies depending on the setting for [Focus Area].
When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible
Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]:
Pressing the key moves the position of the focusing frame using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
Note
You cannot set the [Focus Standard] function to [Left Button] or [Right Button].
Related Topic
Focus Area
76
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)

(Switch V/H AF Area)
You can set whether to switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the
camera (horizontal/vertical). This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to change the camera
position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Switch V/H AF Area] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).
AF Point Only:
Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [Focus
Area] is fixed.
AF Point + AF Area:
Switches both the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
An example when [AF Point + AF Area] is selected
(A) Vertical: [Flexible Spot] (Upper left corner)

(B) Horizontal: [Flexible Spot] (Upper right corner)
(C) Vertical: [Zone] (Lower left corner)
Three camera orientations are detected: horizontal, vertical with the side of the shutter button facing up, and vertical
with the side of the shutter button facing down.
Note
If the setting for [ Switch V/H AF Area] is changed, the focus settings for each camera orientation will not be retained.
The [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame will not change even when [ Switch V/H AF Area] is set to [AF Point
+ AF Area] or [AF Point Only] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Movie], or [High Frame Rate]
While the shutter button is pressed halfway down
During movie shooting
While using the digital zoom function
While the auto-focusing is activated
During continuous shooting
During the countdown for the self-timer
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated
When you shoot images right after the power is turned on and the camera is vertical, the first shot is taken with the horizontal
focus setting or with the last focus setting.
77
The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.
Related Topic
Focus Area
78
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
AF/MF control
You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice versa while shooting without changing your
holding position.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired button → [AF/MF
Control Hold] or [AF/MF Ctrl Toggle].
Menu item details

AF/MF Control Hold :
Switches the focusing mode while the button is held down.
AF/MF Ctrl Toggle :
Switches the focusing mode until the button is pressed again.
Note
You cannot set the [AF/MF Control Hold] function to [Left Button] or [Right Button] of the control wheel.
Related Topic
79
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Face/Eye AF Set.
This function is used to determine whether or not the camera will focus with priority on faces or eyes.
There are two ways to perform [Eye AF].
Focusing on the eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

Focusing on the eyes by pressing the custom key. For details on using the custom key to perform [Eye AF], refer to
the explanation below (▼).
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → desired setting item.
Menu item details

Face/Eye Priority in AF :
Sets whether or not to detect faces or eyes inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is
activated. ([On]/[Off])
(Note: The camera operations are different when using the custom key to execute [Eye AF].)
Subject Detection :
Selects the target to be detected.
[Human]: Detects human faces/eyes.
[Animal]: Detects animal eyes. Animal faces are not detected.
Right/Left Eye Select :
Specifies the eye to be detected when [Subject Detection] is set to [Human]. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is selected, only
the selected eye is detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], [Right/Left Eye Select] cannot be used.
[Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.
[Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
[Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
Face/Eye Frame Display :
Sets whether or not to display the face/eye detection frame when a human face or eyes are detected. ([On]/[Off])
Animal Eye Display :
Sets whether or not to display the eye detection frame when the eye of an animal is detected. ([On]/[Off])
Face detection frame

When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When the product determines that autofocus is
enabled, the face detection frame turns white.
In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the product automatically selects
the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over that face turns white. The face detection frames of other
registered faces turn reddish-purple.
80
Eye detection frame
A white eye detection frame appears when an eye is detected and the camera determines that autofocusing is possible,
depending on the settings.
The eye detection frame is displayed as follows when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal].
[Eye AF] by custom key

The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning [Eye AF] to a custom key. The camera can focus on eyes as long as
you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen
regardless of the setting for [Focus Area]. The camera does not focus automatically if no faces or eyes are detected.
(Note: When you try to focus on eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down, the camera only detects faces or
eyes inside the focus area designated with [Focus Area]. If the camera detects no faces or eyes, it performs normal
auto-focusing.)
1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign the [Eye
AF] function to the key.
2. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Subject Detection] → desired setting.
3. Point the camera at the face of a human or animal, and press the key to which you have assigned the [Eye AF]
function.
To shoot a still image, press the shutter button while pressing the key.
[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key

When [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch the eye to be detected by pressing the
custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom
key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to
automatic eye detection.
Pressing the center of the control wheel
Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)
Stopping pressing the custom key to which [Eye AF] is assigned (only during still image shooting)
Pressing the MENU button
Hint
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is not set to [Auto], or you execute [Switch Right/Left Eye] using the custom key, the eye detection
frame appears. Even when [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], if [Face/Eye Frame Display] is set to [On], the eye detection
frame will appear over detected eyes during movie shooting.
If you want the face or eye detection frame to disappear within a certain period of time after the camera has focused on the face
or eye, set [AF Area Auto Clear] to [On].
To detect animal eyes, arrange the composition so that both eyes and the nose of the animal are within the angle of view. Once
you focus on the animal’s face, the animal’s eyes will be detected more easily.
81
Note
When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human], the eyes of animals are not detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal],
human faces are not detected.
When [Scene Selection] is set to [Portrait], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On], and [Subject Detection] is locked to
[Human].
When [Scene Selection] is set to [Pet], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On], and [Subject Detection] is locked to [Animal].
When [Smile Shutter] is set to [On], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On], and [Subject Detection] is locked to [Human].
When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the following functions cannot be used.
Tracking function
Soft Skin Effect
The [Eye AF] function may not function very well in the following situations:
When the person is wearing sunglasses.
When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.
In low-light or back-lit conditions.
When the eyes are closed.
When the subject is in the shade.
When the subject is out of focus.
When the subject is moving too much.
If the subject is moving too much, the detection frame may not be displayed correctly over their eyes.
Depending on the circumstances, the eyes cannot be focused.
When the camera cannot focus on human eyes, it will detect and focus on the face instead. The camera cannot focus on eyes
when no human faces are detected.
The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces in some conditions.
When recording movies with [Subject Detection] set to [Animal], you cannot use the eye detection function.
The eye detection frame is not displayed when the Eye AF function is unavailable.
You cannot use the face/eye detection function with the following functions:
Zoom functions other than the optical zoom.
[Sweep Panorama]
[Posterization] under [Picture Effect]
Focus Magnifier
When [Scene Selection] is set to [Landscape], [Night Scene], or [Sunset]
Movie shooting with [ Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p]
When shooting with a high frame rate.
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M],
and [ 4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI]
Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.
Even if [Face/Eye Frame Display] or [Animal Eye Display] is set to [Off], a green focusing frame will be displayed over faces or
eyes that are in focus.
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto] or [Superior Auto], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On].
Even when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the eyes of some types of animals cannot be detected.
Related Topic
Focus Mode
Focus Area
AF Area Auto Clear
82
83
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
This camera has the function of tracking which tracks the subject, and keeps marking it with the focusing frame.
You can set the start position to track by selecting from focusing areas, or by specifying by touch operation. The required
function varies depending on the setting method.
For the examples of usage, etc. of tracking function, refer to the following URL.
For still image shooting:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/dsc/l/dsc-rx100m7/still_tracking.php
For movie shooting:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/dsc/l/dsc-rx100m7/movie_tracking.php
You can refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
Setting the start position to track by focusing area ([Tracking] under [Focus Area])
The selected focusing frame is set as the start position to track, and the tracking starts by pressing the shutter button
halfway down.
This function is available in still image shooting mode.

This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
Setting the start position to track by touch operation ([Touch Tracking] under [Func. of Touch
Operation])
You can set the subject to track by touching it on the monitor.
This function is available in still image shooting mode and movie shooting mode.
This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF] or [Continuous AF].
Changing the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking] temporarily ([Tracking On] under [ Custom
Key])
Even [Focus Area] is set to other than [Tracking], you can temporarily change the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking]
while pressing and holding the key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] function.
Assign the [Tracking On] function to a desired key using [ Custom Key] in advance.
This function is available in still image shooting mode.
This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
Related Topic
Focus Mode
Focus Area
84
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when
shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you
can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.
How to register focus area

1. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Area Registration] → [On].
2. Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.
How to call up the registered focus area

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired key, then select [Regist. AF Area hold].
2. Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and
then press the shutter button to shoot images.
Hint
When a focusing frame is registered using [ AF Area Registration], the registered focusing frame flashes on the monitor.
If you assign [Regist AF Area tggle] to a custom key, you can use the registered focusing frame without holding down the key.
Note
A focus area cannot be registered in the following situations:
The mode dial is set to either (Movie) or
While [Touch Focus] is being performed
While [Touch Tracking] is being performed
While focusing
While performing focus lock
You cannot assign [Regist. AF Area hold] to [Left Button] or [Right Button].
You cannot call up the registered focus area in the following situations:
The mode dial is set to either (Auto Mode), (Movie) or
When [ AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the [Wheel Lock] setting is locked to [Unlock].
Related Topic
Focus Area
85
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using [ AF Area Registration].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Del. Regist. AF Area].
Related Topic
86
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Frame Color
You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,
make it more visible by changing its color.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Frame Color] → desired color.
Menu item details

White:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.
Red:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.
87
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down. During focusing operations,
the screen may shake.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Pre-AF] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
88
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. In the time between pressing
the shutter button halfway down and locking the focus, the AF illuminator lights up to allow the camera to focus easily.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Illuminator] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
The AF illuminator lights up automatically in dark surroundings.
Off:
Does not use the AF illuminator.
Note
You cannot use [ AF Illuminator] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is [Movie] or [High Frame Rate].
Sweep Panorama
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is moving (when the focus indicator or
lights up).
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated.
When [Scene Selection] is set to the following modes:
[Landscape]
[Sports Action]
[Night Scene]
[Pet]
[Fireworks]
The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard, do not look directly into the AF illuminator at close
range.
89
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
AF Area Auto Clear
Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is
achieved.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.
90
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Disp. cont. AF area
You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], in
[Continuous AF] mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Disp. cont. AF area] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.
Note
When [Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center]
[Flexible Spot]
[Expand Flexible Spot]
91
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Phase Detect. Area
Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Phase Detect. Area] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the Phase Detection AF area.
Off:
Does not display the Phase Detection AF area.
Note
When the F-value is larger than F8, Phase Detection AF cannot be used. Only Contrast AF is available.
When recording movies, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed.
92
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame with
[Focus Area] set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. This function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the
other quickly.
1 MENU→ (Camera Settings1)→[Circ. of Focus Point] → desired setting.
When [Circulate] is selected:
Menu item details

Does Not Circulate :
The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Circulate :
The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Related Topic
Focus Area
93
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Manual Focus
When it is difficult to focus properly in the autofocus mode, you can adjust the focus manually.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [Manual Focus].
2 Rotate the control ring to achieve sharp focus.
When you rotate the control ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.
3 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.
Note
When you use the viewfinder, adjust the diopter level to obtain the correct focus on the viewfinder.
If you re-select the [Focus Mode], any focus distance that you set manually will be canceled.
The displayed focus distance is just a reference.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
Peaking Setting
94
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [DMF].
2 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.
3 Keep the shutter button pressed halfway down, and then rotate the control ring to achieve a sharper focus.
When you rotate the control ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.
4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.
Related Topic
Peaking Setting
95
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Magnifier
You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [ MF Assist], you can magnify the image without operating the control ring.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].
2 Press the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge using
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.
You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus
Mag.].
3 Confirm the focus.

Press the (Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. The [Focus
Magnifier] function will be canceled when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Focus Magnif. Time].
4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.
To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation

You can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
Then, select the appropriate settings under [Touch Panel/Pad]. When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can
perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on while shooting with the monitor.
While shooting with the viewfinder, a frame is displayed in the center of the monitor by double-tapping and you can move
the frame by dragging it. The image is magnified by pressing the center of the control wheel.
Hint
While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.
To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. You can also exit the focus magnifier function by pressing the
shutter button halfway down.
Related Topic
Focus Magnif. Time
Touch Operation
96
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus shooting.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ MF Assist] → [On].
2 Turn the control ring to adjust the focus.
The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.
Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif.
Time].
Note
You cannot use [ MF Assist] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Focus Magnif. Time
97
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Magnif. Time
Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [ MF Assist] or [Focus Magnifier] function.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.
Menu item details

2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
98
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x5.3:
Displays a 5.3-times enlarged image.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
99
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Peaking Setting
Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Peaking Display:
Sets whether to display peaking.
Peaking Level:
Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas.
Peaking Color:
Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas.
Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject.
The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
100
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Drive Mode
Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.
1 Select / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
Menu item details

Single Shooting :
Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting :
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Single Burst Shoot. :
Captures seven consecutive still images at a higher speed than with [Cont. Shooting]. The speed reaches a maximum of
90 images per second.
Self-timer :
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed.
Self-timer(Cont) :
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket :
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of exposure.
Single Bracket :
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degrees of exposure.
WB bracket :
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket :
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action] is selected, [Single Shooting] cannot be performed.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Single Burst Shoot.
Self-timer
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
101
DRO Bracket
102
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Cont. Shooting
1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Shooting].
You can also set the continuous shooting by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
Menu item details

Continuous Shooting: Hi / Continuous Shooting: Mid/ Continuous Shooting: Lo
Shutter Type
Mechanical Shutter Auto/Electronic Shutter
Continuous Shooting: Hi – 20 images per second at maximum*
Continuous Shooting: Mid 10 images per second at maximum* 10 images per second at maximum*
Continuous Shooting: Lo 3 images per second at maximum 5 images per second at maximum
* When the F-value is greater than F8, the focus is locked to the setting in the first shot.
Hint
To continuously adjust the focus and exposure during continuous shooting, set as follows:
[Focus Mode]: [Continuous AF]
[ AEL w/ shutter]: [Off] or [Auto]
Note
Continuous shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and a scene other than [Sports Action] is selected.
[Picture Effect] is set to one of the following: [Soft Focus] [HDR Painting] [Rich-tone Mono.] [Miniature] [Watercolor] [Illustration]
[DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].
[ISO] is set to [Multi Frame NR].
[Smile Shutter] is being used.
When [ Shutter Type] is set to [Mechanical Shutter], the continuous shooting speed cannot be set to [Continuous Shooting:
Hi].
The speed of continuous shooting decreases when you shoot with a flash.
Related Topic
Focus Mode
103
104
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Single Burst Shoot.
Captures seven consecutive still images at a higher speed (maximum of 90 images per second) to increase the
probability of capturing a decisive moment.
This function is useful when you want to shoot a scene that is difficult to capture using [Single Shooting], or a brief
moment that falls between shots with [Cont. Shooting]. [Single Burst Shoot.] uses the electronic shutter so that you can
shoot continuously without the screen blacking out.
Conceptual diagram
Available burst speeds
Setting Burst speed Shooting interval (A) Total shooting time (B)
Single Burst Shooting: Hi 90 images per second at maximum Approx. 0.011 seconds Approx. 0.067 seconds
Single Burst Shooting: Mid 60 images per second at maximum Approx. 0.017 seconds Approx. 0.1 seconds
Single Burst Shooting: Lo 30 images per second at maximum Approx. 0.033 seconds Approx. 0.2 seconds
1 Press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → [Single Burst Shoot.].
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1 ) → [Drive Mode].
3 Press the shutter button right before the moment you want to record.
Press the shutter button so that the moment you want to capture will fit within the total shooting time for the
seven images.
The followings are tips to improve the timing of shooting:
105
Set [Focus Mode] to [Single-shot AF], and then wait until the right moment comes with the shutter button
pressed halfway down (Focus lock). Or, set [Focus Mode] to [Manual Focus] and focus on the subject in
advance. Then, press the shutter button at the right moment.
Press the shutter button slightly early, taking into account the release time lag. (The release time lag is the
slight lag between the timing of the shutter button being pressed and moment when the shutter is actually
released.)
Perform a test shooting to confirm how [Single Burst Shoot.] works before the actual shooting.
Seven still images will be recorded, even if you do not hold down the shutter button.
Menu item details

You can select from the following shooting speeds.
Single Burst Shooting: Hi:

Shoots seven images continuously at a maximum shooting speed of 90 images / sec.
Single Burst Shooting: Mid:
Single Burst Shooting: Lo:
Hint
To visually confirm that seven shots are being taken, you can display a mark (such as a frame) on the screen, indicating that you
are actually shooting, by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Timing Disp.].
To visually confirm the moment when shooting starts, you can make the screen turn black (black out) only while shooting the first
image, by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Start Disp.].
You can set whether or not to use the self-timer for [Single Burst Shoot.] by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Single Burst Self-timer].
Still images shot with [Single Burst Shoot.] are displayed as a group on the playback screen.
Note
You cannot perform another shooting session until seven images have been shot.
You cannot perform single burst shooting if there is not enough space for seven images on the memory card, or in the buffer
memory of the camera.
The exposure, focus, and white balance are locked to the values for the first image.
A shutter speed slower than 1/8 second cannot be set.
Depending on the shutter speed, the burst speed may be slower.
[Single Burst Shoot.] does not function under the following conditions:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Scene Selection], or [Sweep Panorama]
When [ Shutter Type] is set to [Mechanical Shutter]
When using the [Smile Shutter] function
The following functions are not available when using [Single Burst Shoot.]:
Use of the flash
[ Auto Object Framing]
[Auto HDR]
[Multi Frame NR]
[Soft Focus], [HDR Painting], [Rich-tone Mono.], [Watercolor], [Illustration], or [Miniature] under [Picture Effect]
The last shot is shown in auto review.
Related Topic
106
Shoot. Start Disp.
107
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to use the self-timer for [Single Burst Shoot.] under [Drive Mode].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Single Burst Self-timer] → desired mode.
2 Press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel.

[Single Burst Shoot.] → Select the desired speed for [Single Burst Shoot.] using the right/left side of the
control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
The self-timer lamp will flash, a beep will sound, and shooting will start after the designated number of seconds
have elapsed.
Menu item details

Off :
Does not use the self-timer during [Single Burst Shoot.].
2 Sec :
Uses the self-timer to start shooting 2 seconds after the shutter button is pressed during [Single Burst Shoot.].
5 Sec :
10 Sec :
Note
Press the shutter button again or press / on the control wheel to stop the self-timer countdown.
Related Topic
Single Burst Shoot.
108
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Self-timer
pressed. Use the 5-second/10-second self-timer when you are going to be in the picture, and use the 2-second self-timer
to reduce camera-shake caused by pressing the shutter button.
1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer].
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and a picture is taken after the designated number of seconds have
elapsed.
Menu item details

The mode determines the number of seconds until a picture is taken after the shutter button is pressed.
Self-timer: 10 Sec
Self-timer: 5 Sec
Self-timer: 2 Sec
Hint
Press the shutter button again or press / on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-timer.
Press / on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.
Set [Audio signals] to [Off] to turn off the beeping sound during the self-timer countdown.
To use the self-timer in bracket mode, select bracket mode under drive mode, then select MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Bracket Settings] → [Selftimer during Bracket].
To use the self-timer when [Single Burst Shoot.] is selected, select MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Single Burst Self-
timer].
Note
The self-timer is unavailable in the following situations:
[Sports Action] under [Scene Selection]
[Smile Shutter]
Related Topic
Audio signals
109
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Self-timer(Cont)
the shutter button was pressed. You can choose the best from multiple shots.
1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer(Cont)].
The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and pictures are taken after the designated number of seconds has
elapsed. The designated number of pictures are taken continuously.
Menu item details

For example, three images are shot when 10 seconds have elapsed after the shutter button is pressed when [Self-
timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.] is selected.
Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.

Hint
Press the shutter button again or press / on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-timer.
Press / on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.
110
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Cont. Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
an image that suits your purpose after recording.
1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Bracket].
The base exposure is set at the first shot.

Keep pressing and holding the shutter button until bracket shooting is finished.
Menu item details

For example, the camera shoots a total of three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.3
EV when [Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected.
Note
The last shot is shown on the auto review.
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]
When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which shifts the amount of flash light even if [Cont. Bracket]
is selected. Press the shutter button for each image.
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
111
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Single Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
the image that suits your purpose after recording.
Since a single picture is taken each time you press the shutter button, you can adjust the focus or the composition for
each shot.
1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Single Bracket].
Press the shutter button for each image.
Menu item details

For example, when [Single Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected, three images are shot one at a time with the exposure
value shifted up and down in increments of 0.3 EV.
Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
112
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Viewfinder
Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV
Monitor (Display All Info. or Histogram)

Ambient light* bracketing
Flash bracketing
Flash compensation -1.0 EV
Monitor (For viewfinder)

Ambient light* bracketing (upper indicator)
Flash bracketing (lower indicator)

Flash compensation -1.0 EV
* Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric bulb and fluorescent lighting. Whereas the flash light blinks for a
moment, ambient light is constant, so this kind of light is called "ambient light."
Note
During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are displayed over/under the bracket indicator.
When you start single bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one as the camera records images.
113
114
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
WB bracket
1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [WB bracket].
Menu item details

White Balance Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance (within the range of 10MK-1*).
White Balance Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the white balance (within the range of 20MK-1*).
*MK-1 is the unit that indicates the capability of color temperature conversion filters and indicates the same value as
"mired."
Note
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
115
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
DRO Bracket
You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer value.
1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [DRO Bracket].
Menu item details

DRO Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 2, and Lv 3).
DRO Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 3, and Lv 5).
Note
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
116
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Bracket Settings
You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance
bracketing.
1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → select bracket shooting mode.
2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Selftimer during Bracket:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released
if using the self-timer.
(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)
Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
117
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can change the angle of the monitor and shoot images while watching the monitor.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Self-portrait/ -timer] → [On].
2 Tilt the monitor approximately 180° upward, and then point the lens at yourself.
3 Press the shutter button. Alternatively, touch the subject on the monitor.
The product starts the self-timer shooting after three seconds.
Hint
If you want to use another Drive Mode than the 3-second self-timer mode, first set [Self-portrait/ -timer] to [Off], then tilt the
monitor upward approx. 180 degrees.
118
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in
advance (Interval shooting). You can then create a movie from the still images produced by interval shooting using the
computer software Imaging Edge (Viewer). You cannot create a movie from the still images on the camera.
For details on interval shooting, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/dsc/l/dsc-rx100m7/interval.php
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].
2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → Select the item you want to set and the
desired setting.
3 Press the shutter button.
When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.
When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.
Menu item details

Interval Shooting:
Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])
Shooting Start Time:
Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59
seconds)
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second
to 60 seconds)
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
AE Tracking Sensitivity:
Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select
[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])
Shutter Type in Interval:
Sets the shutter type during interval shooting. ([Mechanical Shutter]/[Electronic Shutter])
Shoot Interval Priority:
Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]
and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([On]/[Off])
Hint
If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen
To go back to the normal shooting mode, select MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval
Shooting] → [Off].
If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will
remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.
119
[AEL hold]
[ AEL hold]
[AF/MF Control Hold]
[Regist. AF Area hold]
[AWB Lock Hold]
[My Dial 1 during Hold] to [My Dial 3 during Hold]
If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.
Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the
still images, you can preview the result.
Note
You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space
on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.
When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able
to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.
During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the
dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed by using
the customized control ring or control wheel.
During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.
[Shutter Type in Interval] is set to [Electronic Shutter] as a default, regardless of the setting for [ Shutter Type].
Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

The shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M
Selectable shutter speeds may differ depending on the setting for [Shutter Type in Interval].
Related Topic
Imaging Edge
120
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Touch Operation
Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Activates the touch operation.
Off:
Deactivates the touch operation.
Related Topic
Touch Pad Settings
Touch Panel/Pad
121
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as "touch panel operations," and touch operations when
shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as "touch pad operations." You can select whether to activate touch panel
operations or touch pad operations.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Panel/Pad] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Touch Panel+Pad:
Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with
the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only:
Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only:
Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
122
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
Set MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] to [On] in advance.
1 Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Shutter].
2 Touch the icon inside the rectangle in the top right of the monitor while the shooting screen is
displayed.
The mark to the left of the icon turns orange, and the touch shutter function is activated.
To cancel [Touch Shutter], touch the icon again.

The touch shutter function is canceled when the camera is restarted.
3 Touch the subject to focus on.
When the subject you touched is in focus, a still image is recorded.
Hint
You can operate the shooting functions below by touching the monitor:
Shooting burst images using the touch shutter
When [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], you can record burst images while touching the monitor.
Shooting burst images of sports scenes using the touch shutter

When [Scene Selection] is set to [Sports Action], you can record burst images while touching the monitor.
Shooting continuous bracket images using the touch shutter

The product shoots three images while automatically shifting the exposure from base, to darker, and then to lighter. When
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Bracket], keep touching the monitor until the shooting ends. After the recording you can select the
image you prefer.
Note
The [Touch Shutter] function is unavailable in the following situations:
During viewfinder shooting
When the shooting mode is set to [Movie]
When the shooting mode is set to [High Frame Rate]
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama]
During [Smile Shutter] mode
When [Focus Mode] is [Manual Focus]
When [Focus Area] is [Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Expand Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
While using the [ Clear Image Zoom]
Related Topic
123
Touch Operation
124
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. This function is available
when [Focus Area] is set to a parameter other than [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] beforehand.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Focus].
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode
You can specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. After touching the monitor and specifying a
position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
1. Touch the monitor.

When shooting with the monitor, touch the position where you want to focus.
When shooting with the viewfinder, you can move the position of the focus by touching and dragging on the
monitor while looking through the viewfinder.
To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch or press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the
monitor, and press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the viewfinder.
2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode (spot focus)
The camera will focus on the touched subject. Spot focus is not available when shooting with the viewfinder.
1. Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.
When you touch the subject, the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus and the focus can be adjusted
using the control ring.
To cancel spot focus, touch or press the center of the control wheel.
Hint
In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible
Spot], the focusing frame can be moved using touch operations.
When the [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.
Note
125
The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the digital zoom
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
126
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image and movie recording modes.
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] in advance.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Tracking].
2 Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.

Tracking will start.
When shooting with the viewfinder, you can use the touch pad to select a subject you want to track.

Hint
To cancel tracking, touch or press the center of the control wheel.
Note
[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:
When [Scene Selection] is [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur].
When shooting movies with [ Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p].
When [ SteadyShot] is set to [Intelligent Active] in the movie mode.
When shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom
When using [Smart Telecon.]
When [Subject Detection] under [Face/Eye AF Set.] is set to [Animal]
Related Topic
Touch Operation
127
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Touch Pad Settings
You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Pad Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Operation in Vertical Orientation :
Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous
operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
Touch Position Mode:
Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen ([Absolute Position]), or move the
focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement ([Relative
Position]).
Operation Area:
Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations
caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
About Touch Positioning Mode
Selecting [Absolute Position] lets you move the focusing frame to a distant position more quickly because you can
directly specify the position of the focusing frame with touch operations.
Selecting [Relative Position] lets you operate the touch pad from wherever is easiest, without having to move your finger
over a wide area.
Hint
In touch pad operations when [Touch Position Mode] is set to [Absolute Position], the area set in [Operation Area] is treated as
the entire screen.
128
Related Topic
Touch Operation
129
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the file format for still images.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ File Format] → desired setting.
Menu item details

RAW:
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for
professional purposes.
RAW & JPEG:
A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files, a JPEG
for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
JPEG:
The image is recorded in the JPEG format.
About RAW images

To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge is needed. With Imaging Edge, you
can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or readjust the white
balance, saturation or contrast of the image.
You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.
RAW images shot by the camera are recorded in the compressed RAW format.
Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG format.
You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.
Related Topic
130
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Selects the JPEG image quality when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [JPEG].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Quality] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Extra fine/Fine/Standard:
Since the compression rate increases from [Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard], the file size decreases in the same order.
This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality is lower.
Related Topic
131
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The
smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Image Size] → desired setting.
Menu item details
When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2
L︓20M 5472×3648 pixels
M︓10M 3888×2592 pixels
S︓5.0M 2736×1824 pixels
L︓18M 4864×3648 pixels
M︓10M 3648×2736 pixels
S︓5.0M 2592×1944 pixels
VGA 640×480 pixels
L︓17M 5472×3080 pixels
M︓7.5M 3648×2056 pixels
S︓4.2M 2720×1528 pixels
L︓13M 3648×3648 pixels
M︓6.5M 2544×2544 pixels
S︓3.7M 1920×1920 pixels
Note
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image size for RAW images corresponds to “L.”
Related Topic
132
133
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.
Menu item details

3:2:
Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film
4:3:
The aspect ratio is 4:3.
16:9:
1:1:
The horizontal and vertical ratio is equal.
134
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Panorama: Size
Sets the image size when shooting panoramic images. The image size varies depending on the [Panorama: Direction]
setting.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Size] → desired setting.
Menu item details

When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Up] or [Down]
Standard: 3872×2160
Wide: 5536×2160
When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Left] or [Right]

Wide: 12416×1856
Related Topic
Sweep Panorama
Panorama: Direction
135
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Panorama: Direction
Sets the direction to pan the camera when shooting panoramic images.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Direction] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Right:
Pan the camera from the left to the right.
Left:
Pan the camera from the right to the left.
Up:
Pan the camera from the bottom to the top.
Down:
Pan the camera from the top to the bottom.
Related Topic
Sweep Panorama
136
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can switch the shooting mode according to the subject or purpose of shooting.
1 Turn the mode dial to select the desired shooting mode.
Available functions
(Auto Mode):
Allows you to shoot still images of any subject under any condition with good results by setting the values determined
appropriate by the product.
P (Program Auto):
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value (F value)).
Also you can select various settings using the menu.
A (Aperture Priority):
Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot when you want to blur the background, etc.
S (Shutter Priority):
Allows you to shoot fast-moving subjects etc., by manually adjusting the shutter speed.
M (Manual Exposure):
Allows you to shoot still images with the desired exposure by adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the
aperture value (F value)).
MR (Memory recall):
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings registered in advance.
(Movie):
Allows you to change the exposure mode for movie recording.
(High Frame Rate):
Allows you to shoot movies with a higher frame rate than the recording format so that you can record smooth super-
slow-motion movies.
(Sweep Panorama):
Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the images.
137
SCN (Scene Selection):
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.
Related Topic
Intelligent Auto
Superior Auto
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Sweep Panorama
Scene Selection
138
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Intelligent Auto
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.
1 Set the mode dial to (Auto Mode).
2 MENU→ (Camera Settings1)→[Auto Mode]→[Intelligent Auto].
3 Point the camera at the subject.

When the camera recognized the scene, the icon for the recognized scene appears on the screen.
Note
The product will not recognize the scene when you shoot images with zoom functions other than optical zoom.
The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting conditions.
For [Intelligent Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on your own.
Related Topic
Mode Dial Guide
139
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Superior Auto
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition. This mode takes clear images of dark or backlit scenes.
For low-lit or backlit scenes, if necessary the camera may shoot multiple images and create a composite image, etc., to
record higher quality images than in Intelligent Auto mode.
1 Set the mode dial to (Auto Mode).
2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Auto Mode] → [Superior Auto].
3 Point the camera to the subject.
When the camera recognizes a scene, scene recognition icon appears on the screen. If necessary, (overlay
icon) may appear.
Note
When the product is used to create composite images, the recording process takes longer than usual. In this case, the
(overlay icon) is displayed and the shutter sound is heard multiple times, but only one image is recorded.
When the (overlay icon) is displayed, be sure not to move the camera before the multiple shots are recorded.
The product will not recognize the scene when you use zoom functions other than optical zoom.
The product may not properly recognize a scene under some shooting conditions.
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the product cannot create a composite image.
For [Superior Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on your own.
Related Topic
Mode Dial Guide
140
141
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
This camera is equipped with the following two automatic shooting modes: [Intelligent Auto] and [Superior Auto]. You can
switch the auto mode to shoot according to the subject and your preferences.
1 Set the mode dial to .
2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Auto Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Intelligent Auto:
Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition.
Superior Auto:
Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition. This mode takes clear images of dark or backlit scenes.
Note
In [Superior Auto] mode, the recording process takes longer, since the product creates a composite image. In this case, the
In [Superior Auto] mode and when the (overlay icon) is displayed, be sure not to move the camera before the multiple shots
are recorded.
For [Intelligent Auto] and [Superior Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on
your own.
Related Topic
Intelligent Auto
Superior Auto
142
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Scene Recognition operates in [Intelligent Auto] mode and [Superior Auto] mode.
This function allows the product to automatically recognize the shooting conditions and shoot the image.
Scene Recognition
When the product recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and guides are displayed on the first line:
(Portrait)
(Infant)
(Night Portrait)
(Night Scene)
(Backlight Portrait)
(Backlight)
(Landscape)
(Macro)
(Spotlight)
(Low Light)
When the product recognizes certain conditions, the following icons are displayed on the second line:
(Tripod)
(Walk)*
(Move)
(Move (Bright))
(Move (Dark))
* The condition (Walk) is recognized only when [ SteadyShot] is set to [Active] or [Intelligent Active].
Related Topic
Intelligent Auto
Superior Auto
143
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Program Auto
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
You can set shooting functions such as [ISO].
1 Set the mode dial to P (Program Auto).
2 Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
Program Shift
When you are not using a flash, you can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing
the appropriate exposure set by the camera.
Turn the control wheel to select the aperture value and shutter speed combination.
“P” on the screen changes to “P*” when you turn the control wheel.
To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to other than [Program Auto], or turn off the camera.
Note
According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not be used.
Set the shooting mode to another one than “P” or turn off the power to cancel the setting you made.
When the brightness changes, the aperture (F-value) and shutter speed also change while maintaining the shift amount.
144
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Aperture Priority
You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing the background.
1 Set the mode dial to A (Aperture Priority).
2 Select the desired value by turning the control wheel.
Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred.
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.
If the aperture value you have set is not suitable for appropriate exposure, the shutter speed on the shooting
screen will blink. If this happens, change the aperture value.
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
Note
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.
145
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Shutter Priority
You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by adjusting the shutter speed, for example, at the
instant of the movement with high speed shutter, or as a trailing image with low speed shutter.
1 Set the mode dial to S (Shutter Priority).
2 Select the desired value by turning the control wheel.
If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks. If this
happens, change the shutter speed.
The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
Hint
Use a tripod to prevent camera-shake when you have selected a slow shutter speed.
When you shoot indoor sports scenes, set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
Note
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.
When [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] and the shutter speed is 1/3 second(s) or longer with a [ Shutter Type] other
than [Electronic Shutter] is set, noise reduction after shooting is performed for the same amount of time that the shutter was
open. However, you cannot shoot any more while noise reduction is in progress.
Related Topic
146
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Manual Exposure
You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and aperture.
1 Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).
2 Press the down side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed or aperture value, then turn the control
wheel to select a value.
You can also set [ISO] to [ISO AUTO] in manual exposure mode. The ISO value automatically changes to
achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.
When [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value indicator will blink if the value you have set is not suitable for
appropriate exposure. If this happens, change the shutter speed or aperture value.
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO], use MM (Metered Manual)* to check the exposure value.
Toward +: Images become brighter.
Toward -: Images become darker.
0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the product.
* Indicates under/over for appropriate exposure. It is displayed using a numerical value on the monitor and with a metering indicator on
the viewfinder.
Hint
By assigning [AEL hold] or [AEL toggle] to a desired key using [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] and turning the control
ring or control wheel while pressing that key, you can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without
changing the set exposure value. (Manual shift)
Note
The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.
147
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Bulb shooting
You can shoot a trailing image of the movement of a subject with long exposure.
Bulb shooting is suitable for shooting trails from stars or fireworks, etc.
1 Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).
2 Press the down side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed, and turn the control wheel
counterclockwise until [BULB] is indicated.
3 Press the down side of the control wheel to select the aperture value (F-value), and turn the control wheel
to set the value.
5 Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.
As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.
Hint
When shooting fireworks, etc., focus at infinity in manual focus mode.
In order to perform bulb shooting without causing the image quality to deteriorate, we recommend that you start shooting while
the camera is cool.
During bulb shooting, images tend to blur. It is recommended that you use a tripod, a RMT-P1BT Bluetooth remote commander
(sold separately) or a remote commander equipped with a lock function (sold separately). When using the RMT-P1BT Bluetooth
remote commander, you can start bulb shooting by pressing the shutter button on the remote commander. To stop bulb shooting,
press the shutter button on the remote commander again. To use the other remote commander, use the model which can be
connected via the Multi/Micro USB terminal.
Note
The longer the exposure time, the more noise will be visible on the image.
When [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On], noise reduction is performed after shooting for the same duration that the shutter
was open. You cannot shoot while noise reduction is in progress.
You cannot set the shutter speed to [BULB] in the following situations:
[Smile Shutter]
[Auto HDR]
[Picture Effect] is set to [HDR Painting] or [Rich-tone Mono.].
[Multi Frame NR]
When [Drive Mode] is set to the following:
[Cont. Shooting]
[Self-timer(Cont)]
[Cont. Bracket]
[ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
If you use the above functions when the shutter speed is set to [BULB], the shutter speed is temporarily set to 30 seconds.
148
If you set [Drive Mode] to [Cont. Shooting] and [ Shutter Type] to [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter] when the shutter speed is set
to [BULB], the shutter speed will be temporarily set to 1/8 second.
Related Topic
Manual Exposure
149
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sweep Panorama
Allows you to create a single panoramic image from multiple images shot while panning the camera.
1 Set the mode dial to (Sweep Panorama).
2 Point the camera at the subject.
3 While pressing the shutter button halfway down, aim the camera at one end of the desired panoramic
composition.
You can change the shooting direction prior to shooting using the control wheel.
(A) This part will not be shot.
5 Pan the camera to the end of the guide in the direction of the arrow on the monitor.
150
(B) Guidance bar
Note
If the entire angle of the panoramic shot is not achieved within the set time, a gray area occurs in the composite image. If this
happens, move the product faster to record the full panoramic image.
When [Wide] is selected for [Panorama: Size], the entire angle of the panoramic shot may not be achieved within the given time.
If this happens, try shooting after changing [Panorama: Size] to [Standard].
Since several images are stitched together, the stitched part may not be recorded smoothly in some cases.
When a light source such as a fluorescent light flickers, the brightness and color of a stitched image may not be consistent.
When the whole angle of panoramic shooting and the AE/AF locked angle are very different in brightness and focus, the shooting
may not be successful. If this happens, change AE/AF locked angle and shoot again.
The following situations are not suited for shooting Sweep Panorama:
Moving subjects.
Subjects that are too close to the product.
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, beach, or a lawn.
Subjects with constant change such as waves or water falls.
Subjects with brightness widely different from its surroundings such as the sun or a light bulb.
The Sweep Panorama shooting may be interrupted in the following situations:

When the camera is panned too fast or too slow.
When the camera shakes too much.
Continuous shooting is performed during shooting Sweep Panorama and the shutter sound keeps beeping until shooting is
finished.
The following functions are not available with Sweep Panorama:

Smile Shutter
Auto Object Framing
DRO/Auto HDR
Picture Effect
Picture Profile
Soft Skin Effect
Long Exposure NR
Tracking function
Zoom
Drive Mode
Bright Monitoring
The values of the settings for some functions are fixed with Sweep Panorama, as follows:
[ISO] is fixed to [ISO AUTO].
[Focus Area] is fixed to [Wide].
[ High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal].
[Flash Mode] is fixed to [Flash Off].
151
Related Topic
Panorama: Size
Panorama: Direction
152
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Scene Selection
1 Set the mode dial to SCN (Scene Selection).
Menu item details

Portrait:
Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.
Sports Action:
Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots
images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
Macro:
Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.
Landscape:
Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.
Sunset:
Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.
153
Night Scene:
Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
Hand-held Twilight:
Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is
applied to reduce subject blur, camera-shake, and noise.
Night Portrait:
Shoots night scene portraits using the flash.
The flash does not pop up automatically. Pop up the flash manually before shooting.
Anti Motion Blur:

Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and
combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
Pet:
Allows you to shoot images of your pet with the best settings.
Gourmet:
Allows you to shoot food arrangements in delicious and bright colors.
154
Fireworks:
Allows you to shoot images of fireworks in all their splendor.
High Sensitivity:
Allows you to shoot still images even in dark locations without using the flash, and reduces subject blur. Also allows you
to shoot dark movie scenes more brightly.
Hint
To change the scene, rotate the control wheel on the shooting screen and select a new scene.
Note
Under the following settings, the shutter speed is slower, so use of a tripod, etc. is recommended to prevent the image from
blurring:
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]
[Fireworks]
In the [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] mode, the shutter clicks 4 times and an image is recorded.
If you select [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] with [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], [ File Format] becomes [JPEG]
temporarily.
Reducing blur is less effective even in [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] when shooting the following subjects:
Subjects with erratic movement.
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, a beach, or a lawn.
In the case of [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur], block noise may occur when using a light source that flickers, such as
fluorescent lighting.
The minimum distance that you can come close to a subject does not change even if you select [Macro]. For the minimum in-
focus range, refer to the minimum distance of the lens attached to the product.
Related Topic
Using flash
155
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with [ /
Memory] in advance.
1 Set the mode dial to MR (Memory recall).
2 Press the left/right side of the control wheel or turn the control wheel to select the desired number, then
You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [
/ Recall].
Hint
To recall settings registered to the memory card, set the mode dial to MR (Memory recall), then select the desired number by
pressing the left/right side of the control wheel.
Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.
Note
If you set [ / Recall] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the
original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.
Related Topic
156
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting.
1 Set the mode dial to (Movie).
2 MENU→ (Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.
3 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.
Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
Menu item details

Program Auto:
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
157
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can select the exposure mode for HFR shooting based on the subject and effect you want.
1 Set the mode dial to (High Frame Rate).
2 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Program Auto:
Aperture Priority:
Shutter Priority:
Manual Exposure:
Related Topic
158
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Exposure Comp.
Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can
make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation).
1 (Exposure Comp.) on the control wheel → press the left/right side of the control wheel or turn the
control wheel, and select the desired setting.
+ (over) side:
Images become brighter.
- (under) side:
Images become darker.
You can also select MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Comp.].
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -3.0 EV to +3.0 EV.
You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.
Monitor
Viewfinder
159
Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.
If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory
effect.
Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Zebra Setting
160
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Exposure Set. Guide
You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Exposure Set. Guide] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not display the guide.
On:
Displays the guide.
161
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Metering Mode
Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the
entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-
weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire
screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the
metering circle depends the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position
of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the
subject while avoiding overexposure.
Hint
When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be
coordinated with the focus area.
When [Multi] is selected and [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on detected
faces.
When [Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] or [Auto HDR] function is activated, the brightness and
the contrast will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow.
Make settings based on the shooting circumstances.
Note
[Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
Other zoom functions than the optical zoom
In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.
Related Topic
AE lock
Spot Metering Point
162
Auto HDR
163
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
Off:
The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto] or [Superior Auto], [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].
When [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is set to [On] and [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal] under [Face/Eye AF Set.], [Face Priority in
Multi Metering] does not work.
Related Topic
Metering Mode
164
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Spot Metering Point
Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot],
[Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Center:
The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link:
The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.
Note
When [Focus Area] is set to other than [Flexible Spot]/[Expand Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Expand Flexible
Spot], the spot metering position is locked to the center.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot], the spot metering position coordinates
to the tracking start position, but does not coordinate with the tracking of the subject.
Related Topic
Focus Area
Metering Mode
165
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
AE lock
When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such as when shooting a backlit subject or a subject
near a window, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and lock the
exposure before shooting. To reduce the brightness of the subject, meter the light at a spot brighter than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen. To make the subject brighter, meter the light at a spot darker than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign
[AEL toggle] to the key.
2 Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.
3 Press the button to which [AEL toggle] is assigned.
The exposure is locked, and (AE lock) is displayed.
4 Focus on the subject again and press the shutter button.
To cancel the exposure lock, press the button to which the [AEL toggle] function is assigned.
Hint
If you select the [AEL hold] function in [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], you can lock the exposure as long as you are
holding down the button. You cannot set the [AEL hold] function to [Left Button] or [Right Button].
Note
[ AEL hold] and [ AEL toggle] are not available when using zoom functions other than optical zoom.
166
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AEL w/ shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [Focus
Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF], and the product determines that the
subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is cancelled.
On:
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust
focus and exposure separately.
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.
Note
When [AEL toggle] is assigned to any key using [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], operation using the key will be given
priority over the [AEL toggle] settings.
167
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering mode.
2 Select the desired value as the metering standard.
You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.
Metering Mode
The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in MENU → (Camera
Settings1) → [Metering Mode].
Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Average/ Highlight
Note
The exposure compensation will not be affected when [Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.
The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [ Spot] during using spot AEL.
The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust].
The value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure compensation value. The amount of
exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure compensation value.
If you set [Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing will be reset.
Related Topic
Metering Mode
168
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Zebra Setting
Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you
have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zebra Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Zebra Display:
Sets whether to display the zebra pattern.
Zebra Level:
Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern.
Hint
You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [Zebra Level]. The
settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom1] and [Custom2] respectively
in the default settings.
To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on
areas that fall within the range you set.
To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a
brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.
Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.
169
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and
the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [D-Range Optimizer].
2 Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.
Menu item details

D-Range Optimizer: Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:
Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5
(strong).
Note
In the following situations, [DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off]:
Multi Frame NR
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off]
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]
[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when the following modes are selected in [Scene Selection].
[Sunset]
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]
[Hand-held Twilight]
[Anti Motion Blur]
[Fireworks]
The setting is fixed to [D-Range Optimizer: Auto] when [Scene Selection] modes other than the above modes are selected.
When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p 100M], [100p 100M], [120p 60M], or [100p 60M], [DRO/Auto HDR] switches to [Off].
When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,
especially when you enhance the effect.
170
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Auto HDR
Shoots three images using different exposures and combines the images with correct exposure, the bright parts of an
underexposed image, and the dark parts of an overexposed image to create images with a greater range of gradation
(High Dynamic Range). One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [Auto HDR].
Menu item details

Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ― Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:
Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimization level from 1.0EV (weak) to
6.0EV (strong).
For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed with the following exposure levels:
-1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0 EV.
Hint
The shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition before shooting.
Note
This function is not available when the [ File Format] is [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Scene Selection]
[Auto HDR] is not available in the following situations:

When [Multi Frame NR] is selected.
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you shoot.
You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of a subject and the shooting conditions.
When the flash is used, this function has little effect.
When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur occurs, you may not obtain good HDR images.
will be displayed over the recorded image to inform you when the camera detects image blurring. Change the
composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.
171
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
ISO Setting: ISO
Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher
the sensitivity.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multi Frame NR:
Combines continuous shots to create an image with less noise. Press the right side to display the setting screen, then
select a desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
Select the desired ISO number from ISO AUTO or ISO 100 – ISO 25600.
ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 64 – ISO 12800:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.
Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right
side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum]. The values are also
applied when shooting in [ISO AUTO] mode under [Multi Frame NR].
You can set the effect level for noise reduction by selecting [NR Effect] under [Multi Frame NR].
Note
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.
When [Multi Frame NR] is selected, the flash, [D-Range Optimizer], or [Auto HDR] cannot be used.
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.
[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following functions:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]
When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may
decrease.
The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.
The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting movies, or using HFR.
ISO values between 64 and 6400 are available in the following situations:
[ Shutter Type] is set to [Auto] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting]
[Multi Frame NR] is not available when [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Single Burst Shoot.].
When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 12800 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 100, the
setting is automatically switched to 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.
The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [Picture Profile].
172
When you use [Multi Frame NR], it takes some time for the product to perform the overlay processing of images.
When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted
within the set range.
173
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set manually.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO Range Limit] → [Minimum] or [Maximum], and
select the desired values.
To set the range for [ISO AUTO]

If you want to adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically set in the [ISO AUTO] mode, select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO] → [ISO AUTO], and then press the right side of the control wheel to select
[ISO AUTO Maximum]/[ISO AUTO Minimum].
Note
ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range become unavailable. To select ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified
range, reset [ISO Range Limit].
Related Topic
ISO Setting: ISO
174
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
If you select [ISO AUTO] or [ISO AUTO] under [Multi Frame NR] when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A
(Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing camera
shake.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.
Menu item details

FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake and
subject blurring.
STD (Standard):
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with less
noise.
1/32000 ― 30":
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.
Hint
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower]
is 1 EV.
Note
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with
an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].
In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
When the maximum shutter speed has changed based on the [ Shutter Type] setting.
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes with the [ Shutter Type] set to [Electronic Shutter]. (The maximum shutter
speed is limited to the flash-syncing speed of 1/100 second.)
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the
speed automatically determined by the camera.)
Related Topic
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
ISO Setting: ISO
175
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various zoom features. The icon
displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom feature.
1. Optical zoom range

Images are magnified within the optical zoom range of this product.
2. Smart Zoom range ( )

Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an image (only when [ JPEG
Image Size] is set to [M], [S] or [VGA]).
3. Clear Image Zoom range ( )

Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration. When you set [Zoom Setting] to [ClearImage Zoom] or
[Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.
4. Digital Zoom range ( )

You can magnify images using an image process. When you set [Zoom Setting] to [Digital Zoom], you can use this
zoom function.
Note
The default setting for the [Zoom Setting] is [Optical zoom only].
The default setting for the [ JPEG Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom, change [ JPEG Image Size] to [M], [S] or
[VGA].
Zooming is not available when shooting panoramic images.
The Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom functions are not available when shooting in the following situations:
[ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
The mode dial is set to (High Frame Rate).
During continuous shooting with [ Shutter Type] set to [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter]
The smart teleconverter function is assigned to one of the custom keys.
You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.
Zooming is not available when the screen is set to HFR (High Frame Rate) shooting.
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing frame is shown
by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.
When you use the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, [Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, the following functions are not available:
Tracking function
Auto Object Framing
Related Topic
176
Zoom
Zoom Setting
About zoom scale
Focus Area
177
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Zoom
Enlarge images using the W/T (zoom) lever when shooting.
1 Enlarge images with the W/T (zoom) lever when shooting.
Move the W/T (zoom) lever to the T side to zoom in and to the W side to zoom out.
Hint
When you select other than [Optical zoom only] for [Zoom Setting], you can exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom to zoom
images.
You can assign the zoom function to the control ring.
Related Topic
Zoom Setting
Zoom Speed
Zoom Func. on Ring
178
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Zoom Setting
You can select the zoom setting of the product.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [ JPEG Image Size] to
[M], [S] or [VGA].
ClearImage Zoom :
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies
images using an image process with less deterioration.
Digital Zoom :
When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale.
However, the image quality will deteriorate.
Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.
Related Topic
About zoom scale
179
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
About zoom scale
The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens changes according to the selected image size.
When [ Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]
Zoom Setting
JPEG Image Size
Optical zoom only (smart zoom) ClearImage Zoom Digital Zoom
L: 20M - Approx. 2.0× Approx. 4.0×
M: 10M Approx. 1.4× Approx. 2.8× Approx. 5.6×
S: 5.0M Approx. 2.0× Approx. 4.0× Approx. 8.0×
Related Topic
Zoom
Zoom Setting
180
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Zoom Speed
Sets the zoom speed of the camera's zoom lever.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Speed] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Normal:
Sets the zoom speed of the zoom lever to normal.
Fast:
Sets the zoom speed of the zoom lever to fast.
Hint
The [Zoom Speed] settings are also used when you are zooming with a remote controller (sold separately) connected to the
camera.
Note
Selecting [Fast] increases the likelihood that the zoom sound will be recorded.
Related Topic
Zoom
181
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Smart Telecon.
Smart Teleconverter magnifies and trims the center of the image, then records it.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → assign the [Smart Telecon.] function to the
desired key.
2 Magnify an image by pressing the key to which you have assigned [Smart Telecon.].
The settings change each time you press the key.
Related Topic
182
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Zoom Func. on Ring
Sets the zoom functions when using the control ring to change zoom scales. The settings for [Zoom Func. on Ring] are
valid only when auto-focusing.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Func. on Ring] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard:
Zooms in/out smoothly when you operate the zoom by turning the control ring.
Quick:
Zooms in/out to an angle of view corresponding to how far the control ring has been rotated.
Step:
Zooms in/out at certain angle steps when you operate the zoom by turning the control ring.
Note
In the following situations, the zoom function activates as if [Zoom Func. on Ring] is set to [Standard], even if it is set to [Step].
When using the W/T (zoom) lever to change the zoom scale.
When recording movies.
When using zoom functions other than the optical zoom.
When the shooting mode is set to something other than [Intelligent Auto] or [Superior Auto], assign the [Zoom] function to the
control ring before using the control ring.
Selecting [Quick] increases the likelihood that the zoom sound will be recorded.
Related Topic
183
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
White Balance
Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when
the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose
for photographic expression.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy / Incandescent / Fluor.: Warm White /
Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White / Fluor.: Daylight / Flash / Underwater Auto :
When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light
source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the
color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for
photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
Hint
You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side
of the control wheel.
If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.
or is displayed only when [Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].
Note
[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the
characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].
Related Topic
Priority Set in AWB
WB bracket
184
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Priority Set in AWB
Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [White Balance]
is set to [Auto].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
Related Topic
White Balance
185
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light sources, it is recommended to use the custom white
balance in order to accurately reproduce the whiteness. You can register 3 settings.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → Select from among [Custom 1] to [Custom 3], and
then press the right side of the control wheel.
2 Select , and then press the center of the control wheel.
3 Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the white-balance capture frame, and then press the
center of the control wheel.
After the shutter sound beeps, the calibrated values (Color Temperature and Color Filter) are displayed.
You can adjust the position of the white-balance capture frame by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the
control wheel.
After capturing a standard white color, you can display the fine adjustment screen by pressing the right side of
the control wheel. You can finely adjust the color tones as needed.
4 Press the center of the control wheel.
The calibrated values will be registered. The monitor returns to the MENU display while retaining the memorized
custom white balance setting.
The registered custom white balance setting will remain memorized until overwritten by the another setting.
Note
The message [Capturing of the custom WB failed.] indicates that the value is in the unexpected range, for example when the
subject is too vivid. You can register the setting at this point, but it is recommended that you set the white balance again. When
an error value is set, the indicator turns orange on the recording information display. The indicator will be displayed in
white when the set value is in the expected range.
If you use a flash when capturing a basic white color, the custom white balance will be registered with the lighting from the flash.
Be sure to use a flash whenever you shoot with recalled settings that were registered with a flash.
186
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when [White Balance] is set to
[Auto] or [Underwater Auto].
This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the
shutter button pressed halfway down.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Shutter AWB Lock] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Shut. Halfway Down:
Locks the white balance while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The
white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.
Cont. Shooting:
Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.
Off:
Operates with the normal auto white balance.
About [AWB Lock Hold] and [AWB Lock Toggle]

You can also lock the white balance in the auto white balance mode by assigning [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle]
to the custom key. Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [
Custom Key]. If you press the assigned key during shooting, the white balance will be locked.
The [AWB Lock Hold] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment while the
button is pressed.
The [AWB Lock Toggle] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment after the
button is pressed once. When you press the button again, the AWB lock is released.
If you want to lock the white balance during movie shooting in the auto white balance mode, select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [ Custom Key].
Hint
When you shoot with the flash while the automatic white balance is locked, the resulting color tones may be unnatural because
the white balance was locked before the flash was emitted. In this case, set [ Shutter AWB Lock] to [Off] or [Cont. Shooting],
and do not use the [AWB Lock Hold] function or [AWB Lock Toggle] function when shooting. Alternatively, set [White Balance] to
[Flash].
Related Topic
White Balance
187
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Creative Style
Allows you to set the desired image processing and finely adjust contrast, saturation and sharpness for each image
style. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you like with this function, unlike with [Scene Selection],
where the product adjusts the exposure.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Creative Style].
2 Select the desired style or [Style Box] using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
3 To adjust (Contrast), (Saturation) and (Sharpness), select the desired item using the right/left
sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.
4 When selecting [Style Box], move to the right side using the right side of the control wheel, and then select
the desired style.
You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.
(A): Displayed only when Style Box is selected
Menu item details

Standard:
For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,
spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral:
188
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing
image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear:
For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
Deep:
For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
Light:
For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
Portrait:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape:
The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also
stand out more.
Sunset:
For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene:
The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves:
For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Style Box):
Select the six style box (the boxes with numbers on the left side ( )) to register preferred settings. Then select the
desired settings using the right button.
To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]

[Contrast], [Saturation], and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each image style preset such as [Standard] and
[Landscape], and for each [Style Box] to which you can register preferred settings.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides
Contrast:
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on
the image.
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is
restrained and subdued.
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value
selected, the more the contours are softened.
Note
[Creative Style] is fixed to [Standard] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
[Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
When this function is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.
189
190
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Picture Effect
Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Effect] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera:
Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color:
Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization:
Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo:
Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key:
Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color:
Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.:
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Soft Focus:
Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
HDR Painting:
Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
Rich-tone Mono.:
Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
Miniature:
Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused considerably. This effect may often
be found in pictures of miniature models.
Watercolor:
Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
Illustration:
Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.
Hint
You can perform detailed settings for some items using the left/right sides of the control wheel.
Note
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom scale larger makes [Toy Camera] less effective.
When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.
You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the product processes the image after the shot. Also, you
cannot shoot another image until image processing is finished. You cannot use these effects with movies.
[Soft Focus]
[HDR Painting]
191
[Rich-tone Mono.]
[Miniature]
[Watercolor]
[Illustration]
In the case of [HDR Painting] and [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the
following:
Do not change the composition during shooting.
When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or subject blur has occurred, you may not be able to
obtain good HDR images. If the product detects such a situation, appear on the recorded image to inform you of this
situation. Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.
This function is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function is not available.
192
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly in the Face Detection function.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Soft Skin Effect] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the [ Soft Skin Effect] function.
On:
Uses the [ Soft Skin Effect].
Hint
When [ Soft Skin Effect] is set to [On], you can select the effect level. Select the effect level by pressing the right/left side of
the control wheel.
Note
[ Soft Skin Effect] is not available when [ File Format] is [RAW].
[ Soft Skin Effect] is not available for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].
193
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When this product detects and shoots faces, macro shooting subjects or subjects that are tracked by [Tracking], the
product automatically trims the image into an appropriate composition, and then saves it. Both the original and the
trimmed images are saved. The trimmed image is recorded in the same size as the original image size.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Auto Object Framing] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not trim images.
Auto:
Automatically trims images into an appropriate composition.
Note
The trimmed image may not be the best possible composition, depending on the shooting conditions.
[ Auto Object Framing] cannot be set when [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[ Auto Object Framing] is not available in the following situations.

The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama]
The shooting mode is set to [Movie]
The shooting mode is set to [High Frame Rate]
The shooting mode is set to [Hand-held Twilight], [Sports Action], [Anti Motion Blur] in [Scene Selection]
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], [Single Burst Shoot.], [Self-timer(Cont)], [Cont. Bracket], [Single Bracket], [WB bracket],
or [DRO Bracket].
The ISO sensitivity is set to [Multi Frame NR].
When shooting in Manual Focus mode
[Picture Effect] is set to [Soft Focus], [HDR Painting], [Rich-tone Mono.], [Miniature], [Watercolor], or [Illustration].
194
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color
space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Color Space] → desired setting.
Menu item details

sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print
out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe
RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”
Note
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be
printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.
When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be
displayed with low saturation.
195
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.
1 MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[ Shutter Type]→desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
The shutter type is automatically switched based on the shooting conditions and shutter speed.
Mechanical Shutter:
Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.
Electronic Shutter:
Shoot with the electronic shutter only.
Hint
In the following situations, set the [ Shutter Type] to [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter].
When shooting with a high-speed shutter in a bright environment such as outside in bright sunlight, the beach, or snowy
mountains.
When you want to increase the speed of continuous shooting.
In the following situations, set the [ Shutter Type] to [Auto] or [Mechanical Shutter].
When you want to use the flash with a shutter speed faster than 1/100 second.
When you are concerned about distortion in the image due to the movement of the subject or the movement of the camera.
Note
When shooting with the electronic shutter, there may be distortion in the image due to the movement of the subject or the camera
itself.
During shooting with the electronic shutter, band-like light-and-dark shading may appear when shooting under flickering light such
as fluorescent light or instantaneous light (such as the flash of another camera).
In rare cases, the shutter sound may be produced when the power is turned off even if the [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic
Shutter]. However, this is not a malfunction.
In the following situations, the mechanical shutter will be activated even if the [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
When capturing a standard white color for the custom white balance
[Face Registration]
The following functions are unavailable when the [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
Long Exposure NR
Bulb shooting
Related Topic
196
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Using the electronic shutter lets you perform various kinds of shooting that are difficult to achieve using the mechanical
shutter, such as shooting without sounds or shaking, shooting with a super-fast shutter, and blackout-free shooting*.
* During blackout-free shooting, the screen does not black out or drop frames and you can keep looking at the subject through the viewfinder or
monitor while shooting images.
Shutter types and camera performance

The camera’s shutter speed range, shutter sound, occurrence of blackout, and availability of the flash for each setting
are as follows:
Shutter Type
Electronic
Auto Mechanical Shutter
Shutter
Single
Single shooting: Single shooting: shooting:
Shutter BULB – 1/32000 BULB – 1/2000 30 – 1/32000
speed Continuous shooting: Continuous shooting: Continuous
1/8 – 1/32000 30 – 1/2000 shooting:
1/8 – 1/32000
Single shooting: Mechanical shutter sound and

Shutter Mechanical shutter sound and Electronic
electronic shutter sound
sound electronic shutter sound shutter sound
Continuous shooting: Electronic shutter sound
Single shooting: Occurs

Blackout Occurs Blackout-free*1
Continuous shooting: Blackout-free*1
Flash Available*2 Available Available*3
*1 When [Shoot. Start Disp.] is set to [On], blackout occurs only when the first image is shot.
*2 The maximum shutter speed is 1/2000 second when using the flash.
*3 The maximum shutter speed is 1/100 second when using the flash.
Advanced shooting using the electronic shutter: Shooting without shutter sound
You can use the electronic shutter to shoot without shutter sound.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Shutter Type] → [Electronic Shutter].
Select [Electronic Shutter] or [Auto] for continuous shooting.
2. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → [Off].
Advanced shooting using the electronic shutter: Blackout-free continuous shooting

You can use the electronic shutter to perform continuous shooting with focus and exposure tracking, without the screen
blacking out.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Shutter Type] → [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter].

2. Turn the mode dial and select P (Program Auto), A (Aperture Priority), S (Shutter Priority), or M (Manual Exposure),
then set the shutter speed and aperture value. (For example: shutter speed of 1/250 second and aperture value of
F2.8)
197
The product will not adjust the exposure in manual exposure mode when [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO].
3. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode] → Select [Continuous Shooting: Hi], [Continuous Shooting:
Mid], or [Continuous Shooting: Lo].
4. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [Continuous AF] → Start shooting images.
Hint
If you want to display the timing of shooting on the screen during blackout-free shooting, adjust the setting using MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Timing Disp.].
To take advantage of the performance of the camera, we recommend that you use an SDHC/SDXC memory card (U3).
Note
When shooting without the shutter sound, do so on your own responsibility, with sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait
rights of the subject.
Even if you set the camera to shoot without the shutter sound, it will not be completely silent.
Even if you set the camera to shoot without the shutter sound, the aperture and focus will make sounds.
If you set [Audio signals] to [Off], the camera will not beep when the subject comes into focus or when the self-timer is in
operation.
During blackout-free shooting, the slower the shutter speed, the lower the refresh rate of the screen. If you want the screen
display to be smooth in order to track the subject, set a shutter speed faster than 1/60 second.
Related Topic
Audio signals
Cont. Shooting
Shoot. Start Disp.
198
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to display marks (such as a frame) on the screen while shooting. This function is useful in situations
where it is difficult to determine the timing of shooting just by looking at the screen, such as when the shutter sound is
turned off.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Timing Disp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On: Type1:
Displays a frame (dark color) around the focusing frame.
On: Type2:
Displays a frame (light color) around the focusing frame.
On: Type3:
Displays (dark color) in the four corners of the screen.
On: Type4:
Displays (light color) in the four corners of the screen.
Off:
Does not display the shutter release timing during blackout-free shooting.
[On: Type1] / [On: Type2] (Example: [Focus Area] is set to [Center])
[On: Type3] / [On: Type4]
Related Topic
Single Burst Shoot.
199
200
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Shoot. Start Disp.
Sets whether or not to indicate the shutter release timing with a black screen during blackout-free shooting. The black
screen makes it easier to visually confirm when the shutter is released.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Start Disp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The screen blacks out when shooting the first image during blackout-free shooting.
Off:
The screen does not black out when shooting the first image during blackout-free shooting.
Related Topic
Single Burst Shoot.
201
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Release w/o Card
Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.
Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.
The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.
202
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Uses [ SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [ SteadyShot].
We recommend that you set the camera to [Off] when using a tripod.
Related Topic
SteadyShot (movie)
203
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When you set the shutter speed to 1/3 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the
duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction is in progress, a message
appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
[ Long Exposure NR] is not available when [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
Noise reduction may not be activated even if [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following situations:
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], [Cont. Bracket] or [Single Burst Shoot.].
The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action], [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] is selected.
[ Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
Depending on the shooting conditions, the camera may not perform noise reduction, even if the shutter speed is 1/3 second(s) or
longer.
204
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product
sensitivity is high.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ High ISO NR] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
[ High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.
[ High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].
205
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Regist. Faces Priority] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Focuses with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].
Off:
Focuses without giving higher priority to registered faces.
Hint
To use the [Regist. Faces Priority] function, set as follows.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [On]
[Subject Detection] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [Human]
Related Topic
Face/Eye AF Set.
206
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Smile Shutter
The camera automatically shoots an image when it detects a smiling face.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Smile Shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the [Smile Shutter] function.
On:
The camera automatically shoots an image when it detects a smiling face. You can select [On: Slight Smile], [On: Normal
Smile], or [On: Big Smile] for the sensitivity of detection.
Tips for capturing smiles more effectively
Do not cover the eyes with front hair and keep the eyes narrowed.
Do not obscure the face by a hat, masks, sunglasses, etc.
Try to orient the face in front of the product and be as level as possible.
Give a clear smile with an open mouth. The smile is easier to be detected when the teeth are shown.
If you press the shutter button during Smile Shutter, the product shoots the image. After shooting, the product returns
to Smile Shutter mode.
Note
You cannot use the [Smile Shutter] function with the following functions:
[Sweep Panorama]
[Picture Effect]
When using the [Focus Magnifier] function.
[Scene Selection] is set to [Landscape], [Night Scene], [Sunset], [Hand-held Twilight], [Anti Motion Blur], [Pet], [Gourmet] or
[Fireworks].
During High Frame Rate shooting
If the product cannot detect a smile, adjust the Smile Detection Sensitivity.
If [Func. of Touch Operation] is set to [Touch Tracking] and you touch a face on the monitor to track while [Smile Shutter] is active,
smile detection will only apply to that face.
207
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
If you register faces in advance, the product can focus on the registered face as a priority.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].
2 Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
3 When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].
Note
Up to eight faces can be registered.
Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask,
sunglasses, etc.
Related Topic
Smile Shutter
208
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will be given priority. You can change the
priority order.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Order Exchanging].
2 Select a face to change the order of priority.
3 Select the destination.
Related Topic
Smile Shutter
209
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Deletes a registered face.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Delete].
If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.
Note
Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the data for registered faces from
the product, select [Delete All].
210
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Using flash
In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting. Also use the flash to prevent camera-shake.
1 Slide the (Flash pop-up) switch to pop up the flash.
The flash does not pop up automatically.
The available flash modes depend on the shooting mode and function.
When you do not use the flash

When not using the flash, press it back into the camera body.
Note
If you fire the flash before the flash unit pops up entirely, it may cause malfunction.
You cannot use the flash when recording movies.
You cannot use the flash when [Drive Mode] is set to [Single Burst Shoot.].
When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the lens may appear on the screen, depending on the
shooting conditions. If this happens, shoot away from the subject or set the zoom to T and shoot with the flash again.
When the monitor is tilted upward 90 degrees or more, it is difficult to operate the (Flash pop-up) switch. Raise the flash unit
before adjusting the monitor angle.
When using flash to shoot pictures of yourself, be careful not to look directly at the light, because the flash will go off at a close
distance. To prevent the flash from hitting the monitor when you press it back down into the camera body after use, first return the
211
monitor to its original position.
Related Topic
Flash Mode
212
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Red Eye Reduction
When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Off:
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.
Note
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and conditions, such as distance to
the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.
213
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Flash Mode
You can set the flash mode.
1 Select (Flash Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.
You can also set the flash mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Mode].
Menu item details

Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the
subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you
to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.
Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.
Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.
Related Topic
Using flash
214
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Flash Comp.
Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light
only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.
Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level
lower.
Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Scene Selection]
The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the
maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.
Related Topic
Using flash
215
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Shooting movies
You can record movies by pressing the MOVIE (Movie) button.
1 Press the MOVIE button to start recording.
Since the [MOVIE Button] is set to [Always] in the default setting, movie recording can be started from any
shooting mode.
2 Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
Hint
You can assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom
Key] → set [MOVIE] to the preferred key.
When you want to specify the area to be focused on, set the area using [Focus Area].
To keep the focus on a face, arrange the composition so that the focusing frame and face detection frame overlap, or set the
[Focus Area] to [Wide].
To adjust the shutter speed and aperture value to the desired settings, set the shooting mode to (Movie) and select the
desired exposure mode.
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed.
The following settings for still image shooting are applied to the movie shooting:
White Balance
Creative Style
Metering Mode
D-Range Optimizer
You can change the settings for ISO sensitivity, exposure compensation, and focus area while shooting movies.
While shooting movies, the recorded image can be output without the shooting information display by setting [HDMI Info. Display]
to [Off].
216
Note
The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording. The sound of the zoom is
particularly likely to be recorded during movie recording if [Zoom Speed] is set to [Fast] or [Zoom Func. on Ring] is set to [Quick].
You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → [Off].
The temperature of the camera tends to rise when shooting movies continuously, and you may feel that the camera is warm. This
is not a malfunction. Also, [Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.] may appear. In such cases, turn the power off and cool the
camera and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.
If the icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen. Turn the power off and cool the camera and wait until the
camera is ready to shoot again.
For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable movie times.” When movie recording is finished, you
can record another movie by pressing the MOVIE button again. Recording may stop to protect the product, depending on the
temperature of the product or the battery.
When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or or when shooting movies, you cannot select [Tracking] for [Focus Area].
In [Program Auto] mode when shooting movies, the aperture value and the shutter speed will be set automatically and cannot be
changed. For that reason, the shutter speed may become fast in a bright environment, and the motion of the subject may not be
recorded smoothly. By changing the exposure mode and adjusting the aperture value and the shutter speed, the motion of the
subject can be recorded smoothly.
In movie shooting mode, ISO sensitivity can be selected from ISO 100 to ISO 12800. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller
than ISO 100, the setting is automatically switched to ISO 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the
original setting.
When ISO sensitivity is set to [Multi Frame NR], [ISO AUTO] will be set temporarily.
In movie shooting mode, the following settings cannot be set in [Picture Effect]. When a movie recording starts, [Off] will be set
temporarily.
Soft Focus
HDR Painting
Rich-tone Mono.
Miniature
Watercolor
Illustration
The Face Detection function / Eye Detection function is not available in the following situations.
[ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M], and [
4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI]
If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting a movie at low ISO sensitivity, the highlighted area in
the image may be recorded as a black area.
If the display mode of the monitor is set to [For viewfinder], the display mode will switch to [Display All Info.] when movie shooting
starts.
Use PlayMemories Home when importing XAVC S movies and AVCHD movies to a computer.
Related Topic
MOVIE Button
Movie w/ shutter
File Format (movie)
Focus Area
217
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Movie w/ shutter
You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the
MOVIE (Movie) button.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Movie w/ shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or during High Frame Rate
shooting.
Off:
Disables movie recording using the shutter button.
Hint
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can still start or stop recording movies using the MOVIE button.
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external
recording/playback device using [ REC Control].
Related Topic
Shooting movies
218
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The following movie recording formats are available with this camera.
What is XAVC S?
Records movies in high definition such as 4K by converting them into MP4 movies using the MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec.
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is capable of compressing images with higher efficiency. You can record high-quality images while
reducing the amount of data.
XAVC S/AVCHD recording format

XAVC S 4K:
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps or approx. 60 Mbps
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).
XAVC S HD:
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps, approx. 60 Mbps, approx. 50 Mbps, approx. 25 Mbps, or approx. 16 Mbps
Records movies in crisper quality than AVCHD with larger amounts of data.
AVCHD:
Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (maximum) or approx. 17 Mbps (average)
The AVCHD format has a high degree of compatibility with storage devices other than computers.
Bit rate is the amount of data processed within a given period of time.
Related Topic
File Format (movie)
AVCHD format
219
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
File Format (movie)
Selects the movie file format.
Menu item details
File Characteristics
Format
XAVC
S 4K You can save movies on a computer using the
PlayMemories Home software.
XAVC Records movies in crisper quality than AVCHD
S HD with larger amounts of data.
The AVCHD format has a high degree of You can save movies on a computer or create a disc that
AVCHD compatibility with storage devices other than supports this format using the PlayMemories Home
computers. software.
Note
When recording XAVC S 4K or XAVC S HD movies in 120p/100p, the amount of time available for continuous recording is
approximately 5 minutes. The remaining time for movie recording is displayed on the monitor. However, when [Auto Power OFF
Temp.] is set to [High], you can record movies continuously for over 5 minutes. If you want to record another session of 4K or HD
120p/100p movie shooting, turn off the camera and wait for some time before you start the next session of shooting. Even if the
recording time was less than 5 minutes, recording may stop to protect the camera, depending on the temperature of the shooting
environment.
When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx.
2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
220
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Selects the frame rate and bit-rate for movie recording.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Record Setting] → desired setting.
The higher the bit-rate, the higher the image quality.
Menu item details

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]
Record Setting Bit-rate Description
30p 100M/ 25p 100M Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).
24p 100M * Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]
Record
Bit-rate Description
Setting
60p 50M/50p Approx. 50

Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
50M Mbps

25M Mbps

50M Mbps

16M Mbps
Approx. 50
24p 50M * Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
Mbps
Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record movies

in 120 fps or 100 fps.
120p 100M/100p Approx. 100
100M Mbps You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing
devices.
221
Record
Setting

120p 60M/100p Approx. 60
devices.
When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD]
60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX) 24 Mbps at maximum Records movies in 1920×1080 (60i/50i).
60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH) Approx. 17 Mbps on average Records movies in 1920×1080 (60i/50i).
Note
Creating an AVCHD recording disc from movies that were recorded with [60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)] as the [ Record Setting]
takes a long time because the image quality of movies is converted. If you want to store movies without converting them, use a
Blu-ray Disc.
[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
222
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
By shooting with a higher frame rate than the recording format, you can record a smooth super-slow-motion movie.
The shooting setting screen will be displayed.
2 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ HFR Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record
Setting], [ Frame Rate], [ Priority Setting], and [ REC Timing].
You can adjust the desired exposure mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2)→[ Exposure
Mode].
3 Point the camera at the subject and adjust settings such as the focus.
You can also change other settings, such as focus mode, ISO sensitivity, etc.
The focus becomes locked once the camera enters the shooting standby, even when using the auto focus. If
you cannot focus on the intended subject using the auto focus, use the manual focus.
The shooting setting screen will close and the camera will switch to the shooting standby.
You cannot adjust the exposure, adjust the focus, operate the zoom, etc. during the shooting standby. If you
want to change the shooting settings, press the center of the control wheel again to return to the shooting
setting screen.
5 Press the MOVIE (Movie) button.
When [ REC Timing] is set to [Start Trigger]:

Movie capturing (shooting) starts. When the MOVIE button is pressed again, or when the recordable duration of
time has elapsed, movie capturing ends and the camera starts to record the captured movie to the memory card.
223
When [ REC Timing] is set to [End Trigger] or [End Trigger Half]:
Movie capturing ends and the camera starts to record the captured movie to the memory card.
Menu item details

Record Setting :
Selects the frame rate of the movie from [60p 50M]/[50p 50M], [30p 50M]/[25p 50M], and [24p 50M*].
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
Frame Rate :
Selects the shooting frame rate from [240fps]/[250fps], [480fps]/[500fps], and [960fps]/[1000fps].
Priority Setting :
Select from [Quality Priority] which prioritizes the image quality and [Shoot Time Priority] which prioritizes the duration of
time of the movie.
REC Timing :
Selects whether to record for a set amount of time after you press the MOVIE button ([Start Trigger]), or for a set amount
of time until you press the MOVIE button ([End Trigger]/[End Trigger Half]).
Frame rate
In super-slow-motion movie shooting, the camera shoots at a faster shutter speed than the number of shooting frames
per second. For example, when [ Frame Rate] is set to [960fps], the shutter speed per frame will be faster than
approx. 1/1000 second in order to shoot 960 frames per second. To maintain this shutter speed, sufficient ambient light is
necessary during shooting. If the ambient light is insufficient, the ISO sensitivity will become higher, resulting in more
noise.
Shortest shooting distance

The image becomes out of focus when the subject is too close, such as during macro shooting. Shoot from the shortest
shooting distance (W side: approximately 8 cm (0.27 ft), T side: approximately 100 cm (3.29 ft) (from the lens)) or further.
Timing of recording
Depending on the [ REC Timing] setting, the relationship between when you press the MOVIE button and the
recorded section of the movie is as shown below.
[Start Trigger]
Movie capturing (shooting) starts when the MOVIE button is pressed. When the MOVIE button is pressed again, or when
the recordable duration of time has elapsed, movie capturing ends and the camera starts to record the captured movie to
the memory card.
(A): The point when the MOVIE button is pressed

(B): Recorded section
(C): Recording to memory card in progress (You cannot start the next session of shooting.)
[End Trigger]/[End Trigger Half]

Buffering (temporarily capturing a movie on the camera) starts once the camera enters the shooting standby. When the
captured data fills the buffering capacity, old data is overwritten sequentially. When you press the MOVIE button, the
camera starts to record a movie of the set duration calculated retroactively from that point on the memory card.
224
With [End Trigger], a movie of the maximum possible duration is recorded. With [End Trigger Half], a movie of half
the maximum possible duration is recorded. With [End Trigger Half], the time it takes to record to the memory card is
also shorter than with [End Trigger].
End Trigger
End Trigger Half

(D): Buffering in progress
To redo shooting
You can cancel recording by selecting [Cancel] on the screen. However, the movie recorded up to the point you
cancelled will be saved.
Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Frame Rate] and [ Record Setting].
Record Setting
Frame Rate
24p 50M* 30p 50M/25p 50M 60p 50M/50p 50M
240fps/250fps 10 times slower 8 times slower/10 times slower 4 times slower/5 times slower
[ Priority Setting] and shooting duration
Priority Frame Effective pixel number read out from

Shooting duration
Setting Rate image sensor
240fps/250fps 1824×1026 Approx. 4 seconds
Quality Priority 480fps/500fps 1824×616

Approx. 3 seconds
960fps/1000fps 1244×420
Shoot Time 240fps/250fps 1824×616 Approx. 7 seconds

Priority
225
Shooting duration
Approx. 7 seconds/Approx. 6
480fps/500fps 1292×436
seconds
Playback time
For example, if you shoot for approx. 4 seconds with [ Record Setting] set to [24p 50M]*, [ Frame Rate] set to
[960fps], and [ Priority Setting] set to [Shoot Time Priority], the playback speed will be 40 times slower and the
playback time will be approx. 160 seconds (approx. 2 minutes and 40 seconds).
Note
Sound will not be recorded.
The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format.
It may take time for recording to finish after you press the MOVIE button. Wait until the camera enters the shooting standby to
start the next session of shooting.
Related Topic
226
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can capture still images while recording movies without stopping recording. Use Dual Rec when you want to record
both movies and still images at the same time.
1 Press the MOVIE button to start recording the movie.
2 Press the shutter button to capture a still image.
If you press the shutter button halfway down, the remaining number of still images you can shoot will be
displayed on the screen.
While shooting still images, the message [CAPTURE] is displayed on the screen.
3 Press the MOVIE button again to finish recording the movie.
Hint
The image size or image quality of the still images can be selected from MENU → (Camera Settings2)→[Img. Size(Dual
Rec)]/[Quality(Dual Rec)].
Note
Dual Rec may be unavailable depending on the recording setting or mode setting.
When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On], Dual Rec is unavailable.
Depending on the memory card you use, it may take a while to record a still image.
The shutter button sound may be recorded.
You cannot use the flash during Dual Rec.
Related Topic
Quality(Dual Rec)
227
Img. Size(Dual Rec)
Auto Dual Rec
228
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Quality(Dual Rec)
Selects the quality of still images to be shot while recording movies.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Quality(Dual Rec)] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Extra fine/Fine/Standard
229
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Img. Size(Dual Rec)
Selects the size of still images to be shot while recording movies.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Img. Size(Dual Rec)] → desired setting.
Menu item details

L: 17M/M: 7.5M/S: 4.2M
230
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Auto Dual Rec
Sets whether or not to automatically shoot still images when shooting movies. Shoots when impressive compositions,
including people, are detected. This function may also record versions of the automatically shot images that have been
trimmed into optimal compositions. When a trimmed image is recorded, both the image before trimming and the trimmed
image will be recorded.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Auto Dual Rec] → desired setting.
2 Press the MOVIE button to start movie recording.
Still images will be shot automatically. While capturing a still image, the message [CAPTURE] is displayed on
the monitor.
3 Press the MOVIE button again to finish movie recording.
To view the movies and still images recorded, press the (Playback) button.
Menu item details

Off:
Auto Dual Rec is not performed.
On: Shoot. Frequency Low/On: Shoot. Frequency Standard/On: Shoot. Frequency High:
Auto Dual Rec is performed with the specified shooting frequency.
The positions, orientation, expressions of faces are detected in order to shoot still images with the impressive
compositions.
Hint
If you want to change the size or quality of still images, use MENU → (Camera Settings2)→[Img. Size(Dual
Even when [Auto Dual Rec] is set to On, you can record still images by pressing the shutter button.
Note
Depending on the recording conditions, still images may not be shot with the optimal timing.
Auto Dual Rec is unavailable when shooting movies vertically.
Related Topic
Quality(Dual Rec)
Img. Size(Dual Rec)
231
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Proxy Recording
Sets whether to simultaneously record low-bit-rate proxy movies when recording XAVC S movies. Since proxy movies
are small in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Proxy Recording] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On :
Proxy movies are simultaneously recorded.
Off :
Proxy movies are not recorded.
Hint
Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format (1280×720) at 9 Mbps. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as
that of the original movie.
Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen). is displayed
over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.
Note
Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.
Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]
When [ SteadyShot] is set to [Intelligent Active]
Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot
delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.
Movies cannot be edited on this camera.
Related Topic
232
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Audio Recording
Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the
camera operating.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Records sound (stereo).
Off:
Does not record sound.
233
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Audio Level Display
Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the audio level.
Off:
Does not display the audio level.
Note
The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:
When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].
When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].
The audio level is also displayed while shooting stand-by in movie recording mode.
234
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Audio Rec Level
You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Rec Level].
2 Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.
Menu item details

+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.
Reset:
Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.
Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record
more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make
the sound easier to hear.
Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.
[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.
[Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during High Frame Rate shooting.
The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the (microphone) terminal input.
235
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Wind Noise Reduct.
Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.
Note
Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal sound to be recorded with too low volume.
When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.
236
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Picture Profile
Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc. For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html.
Customizing the picture profile

You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and [Detail]. When setting
these parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → the profile you want to change.
2 Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.
3 Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
4 Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press in the center.
Using the preset of the picture profile
The default settings [PP1] through [PP10] for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting
conditions.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → desired setting.
PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma.
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma.
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma.
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5:
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma.
PP6:
PP7:
Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma.
PP8:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3.Cine] under [Color Mode].
PP9:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3] under [Color Mode].
PP10:
Example setting for recording HDR movies using [HLG2] gamma.
HDR movie recording

The camera can record HDR movies when a gamma from [HLG], [HLG1] to [HLG3] is selected in the picture profile.
Picture profile preset [PP10] provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using [PP10] can be
viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG).
237
This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or
over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program production, as defined in the international standard Recommendation
ITU-R BT.2100.
Items of the picture profile
Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)
Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie.
(equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after
shooting.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the
picture will be processed after shooting.
HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower
dynamic range than with [HLG2] or [HLG3].
HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than [HLG2]. However, noise may increase.
[HLG1], [HLG2], and [HLG3] all apply a gamma curve with the same characteristics, but each offers a different
balance between dynamic range and noise reduction. Each has a different maximum video output level, as follows:
[HLG1]: approx. 87%, [HLG2]: approx. 95%, [HLG3]: approx. 100%.
Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
[Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))
Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity
areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
[Knee] is disabled if [Mode] is set to [Auto] when [Gamma] is set to [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], [S-
Log3], [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3]. To enable [Knee], set [Mode] to [Manual].
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.
Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode ].

Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)
Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].

Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))
238
Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
In [Color Mode], only [BT.2020] and [709] are available when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1] or [Cine2].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709
gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set
to [S-Log2].
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when
[Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital
cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is
set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
BT.2020: Standard color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
709: Color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] and movies are recorded with HDTV color
(BT.709).
Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)
Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)
Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for
achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you
decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)
Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to
the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower
DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)
To copy the settings to another picture profile number

You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Copy].
239
To reset the picture profile to the default setting
You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Reset].
Note
Since the parameters are shared for movie and still images, adjust the value when you change the shooting mode.
If you develop RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth
When the [ Record Setting] is [120p 100M]/[100p 100M] or [120p 60M]/[100p 60M], [Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot
be adjusted.
If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.
When using S-Log2 or S-Log3 gamma, the noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using other gammas. If the noise
still is significant even after processing pictures, it may be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic
range becomes narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by
test shooting when using S-Log2 or S-Log3.
Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, perform
custom setup with a gamma other than [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], or [S-Log3] first, and then reselect [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2],
or [S-Log3] gamma.
Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] disables the [Black Level] setting.
If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set] under [Knee], [Knee] will be disabled.
S-Gamut, S-Gamut3.Cine, and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this camera's S-Gamut setting does not
support the whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.
Related Topic
Gamma Disp. Assist
240
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Gamma Disp. Assist
Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range.
Movies with the HLG gamma are assumed to be displayed on HDR-compatible monitors. They are therefore displayed in
low contrast during shooting, and may be difficult to monitor. However, you can use the [Gamma Disp. Assist] function to
reproduce contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when
playing back movies on the camera's monitor/viewfinder.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Gamma Disp. Assist].
2 Select the desired setting using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not apply [Gamma Disp. Assist].
Auto:
Displays movies with an [S-Log2→709(800%)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [S-Log2], and with an [S-
Log3→709(800%)] effect when the gamma is set to [S-Log3]. Displays movies with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect when the
gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3], and [Color Mode] is set to [BT.2020].
Displays movies with an [HLG(709)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3],
and [Color Mode] is set to [709].
S-Log2→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log2 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
S-Log3→709(800%):
HLG(BT.2020):
Displays movies after adjusting the image quality of the monitor or viewfinder to a quality that is almost the same as
when movies are displayed on an [HLG(BT.2020)] compatible monitor.
HLG(709):
when movies are displayed on an [HLG(709)] compatible monitor.
Note
Movies in the XAVC S 4K or XAVC S HD format with the [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] gamma are displayed with an
[HLG(BT.2020)] effect or [HLG(709)] effect depending on the movie’s gamma value and color mode. In other situations, movies
are displayed according to the gamma setting and color mode setting in [Picture Profile].
[Gamma Disp. Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the camera.
Related Topic
Picture Profile
241
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise
in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off:
Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record
movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
Note
[ Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:
(Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]
242
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.
Menu item details

x1.0:
x4.0:
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
243
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF drive speed] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Fast:
Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
Normal:
Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
Slow:
Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is
changed.
Note
When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p], [ AF drive speed] cannot be used.
244
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set the AF sensitivity in movie mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF Tracking Sens.]→desired setting.
Menu item details

Responsive:
Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
Standard:
Sets the AF sensitivity to normal. This mode is useful when there are obstacles in front of the subject or in crowded
places.
Note
When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p], [ AF Tracking Sens.] cannot be used.
245
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
SteadyShot (movie)
Sets [ SteadyShot] effect when shooting movies. If you set the [ SteadyShot] effect to [Off] when using a tripod
(sold separately), a natural image is produced.
Menu item details

Intelligent Active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect than [Active].
Active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
Standard:
Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
Off:
Note
If you change the setting for [ SteadyShot], the angle of view will change.
[Intelligent Active] cannot be selected when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K].
Related Topic
246
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
TC/UB Settings
The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → setting value you want to change.
Menu item details

TC/UB Disp. Setting:
Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset:
Sets the time code.
UB Preset:
Sets the user bit.
TC Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
How to set the time code (TC Preset)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [60i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29
* When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames.
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.
Note
When you tilt the monitor to shoot a self-portrait, the time code and user bit will not be displayed.
How to reset the time code

2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00:00).
You can also reset the time code (00:00:00:00) using the RMT-VP1K remote commander (sold separately).
How to set the user bit (UB Preset)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].

How to reset the user bit
247
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).
How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format *1)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format].
DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame*2 format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
*1 Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*2 The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods
of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make
the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time
code without this correction is called non-drop frame.
The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.
How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run].
Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from
the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.
The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in
[Rec Run] mode.
When the recording format is changed.
When the recording medium is removed.
How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make].
Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code
consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.
248
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
TC/UB Disp. Switch
Allows you to display the time code (TC) and user bit (UB) of a movie by pressing the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch]
function has been assigned.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], [ Custom Key], or [ Custom Key] → assign
the [TC/UB Disp. Switch] function to the desired key.
2 Press the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch] is assigned.
Each time you press the key, the monitor display will switch from the movie recording time counter → time code
(TC) → user bit (UB), in that order.
Note
When the monitor is flipped while in a shooting mode, such as during self-portrait shooting, TC/UB information is not displayed. In
the playback mode, TC/UB information is displayed even when the monitor is flipped.
249
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
MOVIE Button
Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [MOVIE Button] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Always:
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode. (except when the mode dial is set to (High
Frame Rate).)
Movie Mode Only:
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [ Movie] mode.
250
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to display markers set using [ Marker Settings] on the monitor or the viewfinder while shooting
movies.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.
Off:
No marker is displayed.
Note
The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to ( Movie) or when shooting movies.
You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].
The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the markers.)
Related Topic
251
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Center:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.
[Off]/[On]
Aspect:
Sets the aspect marker display.
[Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV.
[Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
[Off]/[On]
Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.
Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced composition.
252
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to 4K-compatible external
recording/playback devices, etc.
1 Turn the mode dial to (movie).
2 Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.
3 MENU → (Setup) → [ 4K Output Select] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Memory Card+HDMI:
Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(30p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(24p):
HDMI Only(25p) *:
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.
Note
This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to a 4K-compatible device.
When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, [HDMI Info. Display] will temporarily be set to [Off].
When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, the counter does not move forward (the actual recording
time is not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recording/playback device.
When shooting 4K movies using the setting [Memory Card+HDMI], the movies will not be output to a device connected by HDMI
cable if you simultaneously record a proxy movie. If you want to perform HDMI output, set [ Proxy Recording] to [Off]. (In this
case, if you set [ Record Setting] to other values except [24p], the image will not be displayed on the screen of the camera).
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and the camera is connected via HDMI, the following functions are partially
restricted.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF]
[Face Priority in Multi Metering]
Tracking function
Related Topic
File Format (movie)
253
254
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Plays back the recorded images.
1 Press the (Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.
2 Select the image with the control wheel.
Images shot with continuous shooting or interval shooting are displayed as one group. To play back the images
in the group, press the center of the control wheel.
Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An image that is not registered in
the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to
the image database file using MENU → (Setup) → [Recover Image DB].
If you play back the images right after continuous shooting, the monitor may display an icon indicating that data is being
written/the number of images left to write. During writing, some functions are not available.
You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move the magnified position on the
monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
Related Topic
Recover Image DB
Display as Group
255
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.
1 Display the image you want to enlarge, and slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the T side.
Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side to adjust the zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location
information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.
2 Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.
3 Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.
Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.
You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [
Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].
Note
You cannot enlarge movies.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
256
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically by detecting the orientation of the camera.
Manual:
Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image
will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Images are always displayed horizontally.
Note
Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera during movie playback.
Related Topic
257
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.
1 Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU → (Playback) → [Rotate].
The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.
Note
Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor or viewfinder of the camera.
You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.
When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the
software.
258
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Playing back panoramic images
The product automatically scrolls a panoramic image from end to end.
1 Press the (Playback) button to switch to playback mode.
2 Select the panoramic image to be played back using the control wheel and press the center to start
playback.
To pause playback, press the center again.

To scroll panoramic images manually, press the top/bottom/right/left during pause.
To return to the display of the entire image, press the MENU button.
Note
Panoramic images shot using other products may be displayed in a different size from the actual size, or may not scroll correctly.
259
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard. Mag.:
Displays an image with the standard magnification.
Previous Mag.:
Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after exiting the playback
zoom mode.
Related Topic
260
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Focused Position:
Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.
Center:
Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.
Related Topic
261
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Playing back movies
Plays back the recorded movies.
1 Press the (playback) button to switch to playback mode.
2 Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel and press the center of the control wheel to
start playback.
Available operations during movie playback

You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by pressing the down side of the control wheel.
: Playback
: Pause
: Fast-forward
: Fast-rewind
: Forward slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
: Next movie file
: Previous movie file
: Displays the next frame
: Displays the previous frame
: Motion Shot Video (Shows the tracking of a subject in motion.)
: Photo Capture
: Sound volume adjustment
: Closes the operation panel
Hint
“Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame” and “Displays the previous frame” are available
during pause.
Movie files recorded using other products may not be able to be playable on this camera.
Note
Even if you shoot the movie vertically, the movie will be displayed horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera.
Related Topic
262
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Motion Shot Video
You can see the tracking of the subject's motion in high-speed, like a stroboscopic image.
1 Press the bottom side of the control wheel during movie playback, then select .
To exit [Motion Shot Video] playback, select .

If you fail to make the trail, you can adjust the interval of the image tracking using .
Hint
You can also change the interval of the image tracking using MENU → (Playback) → [Motion Interval ADJ].
Note
You cannot save the images made with [Motion Shot Video] as a movie file.
If the motion of the subject is too slow or the subject does not move enough, the product may fail to create the image.
Related Topic
Motion Interval ADJ
263
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Motion Interval ADJ
You can adjust the interval of the tracking of the subject’s motion.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Motion Interval ADJ] → desired setting.
Related Topic
Motion Shot Video
264
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Volume Settings
Sets the sound volume for movie playback.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.
Adjusting the volume during playback

Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the
volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.
265
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Photo Capture
Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback
to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.
1 Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.
2 MENU → (Playback) → [Photo Capture].
3 Play back the movie and pause it.
4 Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and
displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.
5 Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.
The scene is saved as a still image.
Related Topic
Shooting movies
Playing back movies
266
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.
1 Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side while the image is being played back.
2 Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control
wheel.
To change the number of images to be displayed

MENU → (Playback) → [Image Index] → desired setting.
Menu item details

9 Images/25 Images
To return to single-image playback

Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.
To display a desired image quickly

Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the
control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing
the center. In addition, you can switch View Mode by selecting an icon.
Related Topic
267
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the View Mode (image display method).
1 MENU → (Playback) → [View Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Date View:
Displays the images by date.
Folder View(Still):
Displays only still images.
AVCHD View:
Displays only AVCHD-format movies.
XAVC S HD View:
Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.
XAVC S 4K View:
Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.
268
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Display as Group
Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting as a group.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Display as Group] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays images as a group.
Off:
Does not display images as a group.
Hint
The following images are grouped.
Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter
button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)
Images shot with [ Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)
Images shot with [Single Burst Shoot.]
On the image index screen, is displayed over the group.
Note
Images can be grouped and displayed only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. When it is not set to [Date View], images
cannot be grouped and displayed, even if [Display as Group] is set to [On].
If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Single Burst Shoot.
269
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge
(Viewer). You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Cont. PB for Interval].
2 Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.
Hint
On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.
You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.
You can change the playback speed by turning the control wheel during playback. You can also change the playback speed by
selecting MENU → (Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval].
You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.
Related Topic
Imaging Edge
270
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. PB for Interval].
1 MENU → (Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval] → desired setting.
Hint
You can also change the playback speed by turning the control wheel during [Cont. PB for Interval].
Related Topic
271
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Automatically plays back images continuously.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Slide Show] → desired setting.
2 Select [Enter].
Menu item details

Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow
when all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.
Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.
You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].
272
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Beauty Effect
Allows you to apply the Beauty Effect to retouch the still image of a person and make it look better, for example, by
retouching it for smoother skin, larger eyes, and whiter teeth. You can set the effects from level 1 to level 5. An image on
which the Beauty Effect is used is saved as a new file. The original image is retained as it is.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Beauty Effect].
2 Select the face for which you want to use the Beauty Effect.
3 Select the desired effect, and adjust the retouching level using the control wheel.
(Skin Toning):
Adjusts the skin color as you like.
1. Select the base skin color using up/down, and then press the center.
2. Adjust the color tone using up/down.
(Skin Smoothing):
Removes age spots and wrinkles from the skin.
Adjust the effect level using up/down.
(Shine Removal):
Reduces the look of oily skin. Adjusts the skin color as you like.
(Eye Widening):
Enlarges the eyes of the subject. Adjust the size of the eyes using up/down.
(Teeth Whitening):
Whiten the teeth of the subject. You may not be able to whiten the teeth in some images.
Adjust the whiteness of the teeth using up/down.
To apply two or more effects consecutively using [Beauty Effect], first apply one effect to the image, and then select
another effect using left/right.
Note
You cannot use [Beauty Effect] for the following images:
Panoramic images
Movies
RAW images
You cannot use the Beauty Effect on an extremely small facial image.
To use the Beauty Effect on two or more faces, select the same image again after the effect has been applied once, and then use
the effect on another face.
The [Beauty Effect] may not work properly for some images.
273
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The mark is displayed on protected images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Protect] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The mark is displayed in the check
box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the mark.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:

Protects all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images taken on the selected date.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.
All Images in This Group:
Protects all the images in the selected group.
Cancel All in This Group:
Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.
Hint
If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], you can protect
images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.
Note
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.
274
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Rating
You can assign ratings to recorded images on a scale from to to make it easier to find images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Rating].
The image rating selection screen will appear.
2 Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and
then press the center.
3 Select the number of (Rating) by pressing the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center.
4 Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.
Hint
You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [
Custom Key] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a rating. The
number of (Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.
Note
You can assign ratings to still images only.
Related Topic
275
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the available number of when rating images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating] using [
Custom Key].
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].
2 Add a mark to the number of that you want to activate.
You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.
Related Topic
Rating
276
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to print out later. The (print order)
icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to “Digital Print Order Format.”
DPOF setting will be retained after the image is printed. We recommend that you cancel this setting after printing.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Specify Printing] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Selects images to order printing.
(1) Select an image and press the center of the control wheel. The mark is displayed in the check box. To cancel
the selection, press the center again and delete the mark.
(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images. To select all the images from a certain date or in a certain folder, select the
check box for the date or folder.
(3) MENU → [OK].
Cancel All:
Clears all DPOF marks.
Print Setting:
Sets whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.
The position or size of the date (inside or outside of the image) may differ depending on the printer.
Note
You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:
RAW images
The number of copies cannot be specified.
Some printers do not support the date print function.
277
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can delete an image displayed. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to be
deleted beforehand.
1 Display the image you want to delete.
2 Press the (Delete) button.
3 Select [Delete] using the control wheel.
Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.
Related Topic
278
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to
be deleted beforehand.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The mark is displayed in the check
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:

Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images taken on the selected date.
All Other Than This Img.:
Deletes all images in the group except the selection.
Deletes all images in the selected group.
Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.
To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:
(Image Index) lever → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date using the
top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within
Note
Related Topic
Format
279
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Delete confirm.
You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.
280
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable
To view images stored on this product using a TV, an HDMI cable (sold separately) and an HD TV equipped with an
HDMI jack are required.
1 Turn off both this product and the TV.
2 Connect the HDMI micro terminal of this product to the HDMI jack of the TV using an HDMI cable (sold
separately).
3 Turn on the TV and switch the input.
4 Turn on this product.
Images shot with the product appear on the TV screen.
5 Select an image using the right/left sides of the control wheel.
The monitor of this camera is not lit up on the playback screen.

If the playback screen is not displayed, press the (Playback) button.
“BRAVIA” Sync
By connecting this product to a TV that supports “BRAVIA” Sync using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can operate
this product's playback functions with the TV remote control.
1. After performing the steps above to connect this camera to a TV, select MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] →
[CTRL FOR HDMI] → [On].
2. Press the SYNC MENU button on the TV remote control, and select the desired mode.
If you connect this camera to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.
281
Only TVs that support “BRAVIA” Sync can provide SYNC MENU operations. For details, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the TV.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to
another manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL
FOR HDMI] → [Off].
Hint
This product is compatible with the PhotoTV HD standard. If you connect Sony PhotoTV HD-compatible devices using an HDMI
cable (sold separately), the TV is set to the image quality suitable for viewing still images, and a whole new world of photos can
be enjoyed in breathtaking high quality.
You can connect this product to Sony PhotoTV HD-compatible devices with a USB terminal using the USB cable.
The PhotoTV HD allows for a highly-detailed, photo-like expression of subtle textures and colors.
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the compatible TV.
Note
Do not connect this product and another device using the output terminals of both. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Some devices may not work properly when connected to this product. For example, they may not output video or audio.
Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo or a genuine Sony cable.
Use an HDMI cable that is compatible with the HDMI micro terminal of the product and the HDMI jack of the TV.
When [ TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [
TC Output] to [Off].
If images do not appear on the TV screen properly, select MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] →
[2160p/1080p], [1080p] or [1080i] according to the TV to be connected.
During HDMI output, when you switch the movie from 4K to HD image quality or vice-versa, or change the movie to a different
frame rate or different color mode, the screen may become dark. This is not a malfunction.
When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On], images cannot be output to an HDMI device while recording a 4K movie.
282
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the
memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.
1 Set the product to the setting you want to register.
2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ / Memory] → desired number.
3 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.
Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed
Optical zoom scale
To change registered settings

Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.
Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.
Program Shift cannot be registered.
Related Topic
283
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can assign the desired functions to the control ring and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of
settings as “My Dial” settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by pressing the custom key
you assigned in advance.
Registering functions to “My Dial”

Register the functions that you want to assign to the control ring and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through [My Dial 3].
1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [My Dial Settings].

2. Select a ring or wheel for (My Dial 1), and press the center of the control wheel.
3. Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
Select “--” (Not set) for a ring or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.
4. After you select functions for all of the ring and the wheel in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select [OK].
The settings for (My Dial 1) will be registered.
If you want to register (My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3) as well, follow the same procedure as described above.
Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”

Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → Select the key that you want to use
to recall “My Dial.”
2. Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”
Menu item details
My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold:
While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in [My Dial Settings] are assigned to the ring/wheel.
My Dial 1→2→3 :
Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: “Normal function → Function of My Dial 1
→ Function of My Dial 2 → Function of My Dial 3 → Normal function.”
Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3:
The function registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again
to return to the normal function.
Shooting while switching “My Dial”

During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning
the control ring/control wheel.
In the following example, the functions listed below are registered to "My Dial," and [My Dial 1→2→3] is assigned to the
C (Custom) button.
My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3
284
Control wheel ISO Tv Creative Style
Control ring Av White Balance Picture Effect
1. Press the C (Custom) button.

The functions registered to [My Dial 1] will be assigned to the control wheel/control ring.
The icons shown below are displayed in the lower part of the screen.
2. Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, and turn the control ring to set the aperture value.
3. Press the C button again. The functions registered to [My Dial 2] will be assigned to the control wheel/control ring.
4. Turn the control wheel to set the shutter speed, and turn the control ring to set [White Balance].
5. Press the C button again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to [My Dial 3].
6. Press the shutter button to shoot.
Note
“My Dial” settings in which every ring/wheel is set to [Not set] are not recalled when you press the custom key. They are also
skipped in [My Dial 1→2→3].
Even if a control wheel has been locked using the [Wheel Lock] function, it will be unlocked temporarily when “My Dial” is
recalled.
Related Topic
285
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Av/Tv Rotate
Sets the direction of rotation for the control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Av/Tv Rotate] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Normal:
Does not change the direction of rotation for the control wheel.
Reverse:
Reverses the direction of rotation for the control wheel.
286
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Wheel Lock
You can set whether or not to lock the control wheel when you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Wheel Lock] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Lock:
Locks the control wheel.
Unlock:
Does not lock the control wheel even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
Hint
You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.
Note
When [ AF Area Registration] is set to [On], [Wheel Lock] is fixed to [Unlock].
Related Topic
287
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Add Item
You can register the desired menu items to (My Menu) under MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Add Item].
2 Select an item that you want to add to (My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control
wheel.
3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
Hint
You can add up to 30 items to (My Menu).
Note
You cannot add the following items to (My Menu).
Any item under MENU → (Playback)
[View on TV]
Related Topic
Sort Item
Delete Item
Using MENU items
288
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sort Item
You can rearrange the menu items added to (My Menu) under MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Sort Item].
2 Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
Related Topic
Add Item
289
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Delete Item
You can delete menu items added to (My Menu) of MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Item].
2 Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center to delete the selected item.
Hint
To delete all the items on a page, select MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Page].
You can delete all the items added to (My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].
Related Topic
Delete Page
Delete All
Add Item
290
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Delete Page
You can delete all the menu items added to a page under (My Menu) in MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Page].
2 Select a page that you want to delete using the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel to delete the items.
Related Topic
Add Item
Delete All
291
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Delete All
You can delete all the menu items added to (My Menu) in MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].
2 Select [OK].
Related Topic
Add Item
Delete Page
292
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.
Off:
The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.
Related Topic
Add Item
293
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Auto Review
You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto
Review.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Auto Review] → desired setting.
Menu item details

10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a
magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.
Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by
the image after processing.
The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.
Related Topic
294
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Live View Display
Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style],
or [Picture Effect] on the screen.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Live View Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Setting Effect ON:
Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This
setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen.
Setting Effect OFF:
Displays Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect].
When this setting is used, you can easily check the image composition.
Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.
When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the icon is displayed on the Live View screen.
Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the
composition.
Note
[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Movie]
[High Frame Rate]
[Scene Selection]
When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the
displayed Live View.
Even if [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], when you use the electrical shutter, images will look as if your settings
were applied.
295
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Grid Line
Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Grid Line] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the
composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.
296
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
FINDER/MONITOR
Sets the method for switching the display between the viewfinder and the monitor.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [FINDER/MONITOR] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
When you look into the viewfinder, the eye sensor reacts and the display is switched to the viewfinder automatically.
Viewfinder(Manual):
The monitor is turned off and the image is displayed only in the viewfinder.
Monitor(Manual):
The viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the monitor.
Hint
You can assign the [FINDER/MONITOR] function to your preferred key.
MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to
the preferred key.
If you want to retain the viewfinder display or the monitor display, set [FINDER/MONITOR] to [Viewfinder(Manual)] or
[Monitor(Manual)] beforehand.
You can keep the monitor off when you take your eyes off the viewfinder during recording by setting the monitor display to
[Monitor Off] using the DISP button. Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] and add a check
mark to [Monitor Off] beforehand.
Note
When the viewfinder is pushed down, the images are always displayed on the monitor regardless of the [FINDER/MONITOR]
setting.
When the monitor is pulled out, the eye sensor will not detect your eye's approach even if the viewfinder is popped up and
[FINDER/MONITOR] is set to [Auto]. The image will continue to be displayed on the monitor.
Related Topic
297
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Monitor Brightness
Adjust the brightness of the screen.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.
Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.
The monitor brightness cannot be adjusted in the following situations. The maximum brightness will be [±0].
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K].
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
The monitor brightness is locked at [-2] when shooting a movie using the Wi-Fi functions.
The monitor brightness is locked at [-2] when an overheating warning is displayed.
298
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Viewfinder Bright.
When using the viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder according to the surrounding
environment.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Viewfinder Bright.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
Adjusts the brightness automatically.
Manual:
Selects the brightness of the viewfinder within the range of –2 to +2.
Note
The viewfinder brightness cannot be adjusted in the following situations. The maximum brightness will be [±0].
299
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Finder Color Temp.
Adjusts the color temperature of the electronic viewfinder.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder Color Temp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

-2 to +2:
When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when you select “+,” it changes to a colder
color.
300
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to turn the power off when the viewfinder is stowed.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Function for VF close] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Power OFF:
Turns the power off when the viewfinder is stowed.
Not Power OFF:
Does not turn the power off when the viewfinder is stowed.
301
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Display Quality
You can change the display quality.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Quality] → desired setting.
Menu item details

High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.
Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the setting may become locked to [Standard].
302
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Auto Monitor OFF
The camera automatically switches to the power-saving mode if you do not operate the camera for a certain period of
time in the still-image shooting mode. This function is useful for reducing the power consumption.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Auto Monitor OFF] → desired setting
Menu item details

Off:
The camera does not switch to the power-saving mode automatically.
2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec:
The camera switches to the power-saving mode and the monitor turns off if a certain number of seconds elapses without
any operations.
When [5 Sec] or [10 Sec] is selected, the monitor darkens two seconds before the end of the duration you have set.
Note
[Auto Monitor OFF] does not activate in the following situations:
When the monitor is flipped up by approximately 180 degrees
When the power-saving function is not activated
303
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Bright Monitoring
Allows you to adjust the composition when shooting in dark environments. By extending the exposure time, you can
check the composition on the viewfinder/monitor even in dark locations such as under the night sky.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → assign the [Bright Monitoring] function to the
desired key.
2 Press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function, then shoot an image.
The brightness due to [Bright Monitoring] will continue after shooting.

To return the monitor brightness to normal, press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function
once again.
Note
During [Bright Monitoring], [Live View Display] will automatically switch to [Setting Effect OFF], and setting values such as
exposure compensation will not be reflected in the live view display. It is recommended that you use [Bright Monitoring] only in
dark locations.
[Bright Monitoring] will be automatically cancelled in the following situations.

When the camera is turned off.
When the shooting mode is changed from P/A/S/M to a mode that is not P/A/S/M.
When the focus mode is set to other than manual focus.
When [ MF Assist] is executed.
When [Focus Magnifier] is selected.
During [Bright Monitoring], the shutter speed may be slower than normal while shooting in dark locations. Also, because the
measured brightness range is expanded, the exposure may change.
Related Topic
Live View Display
304
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Format
When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the
camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory
card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Format].
Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).
The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.
Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable
depending on the format type.
It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.
You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.
305
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets file names for still images to be shot, and specifies folders for storing the shot still images.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [ File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.
[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.
Set File Name:
You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
Select REC Folder:
Selects the folder in which images are stored when [Folder Name] is set to [Standard Form].
New Folder:
Creates a new folder for still images to be stored. A new folder numbered with the previous folder number +1 will be
created.
Folder Name:
You can set how folder names are assigned.
[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + MSDCF”.
Example: 100MSDCF
[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.
Example: 10090405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2019)
Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first
character.
The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.
When [Folder Name] is set to [Date Form], you cannot select the folder where files are stored.
A new folder may be automatically created if you shoot images using a memory card that has been used in another device.
Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be automatically
created.
306
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [ File Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.
[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
Series Counter Reset:
Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].
File Name Format:
You can set the format for movie file names.
[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001
[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”
[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”
[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”
Title Name Settings:
You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].
Note
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for [Title Name Settings]. Up to 37 characters can be entered.
Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is made.
[ File Settings] does not apply to AVCHD movies.
You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.
If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].
If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”
307
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Display Media Info.
Displays the recordable time of movies for the inserted memory card. Also displays the number of recordable still images
for the inserted memory card.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Media Info.].
308
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Recover Image DB
If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images
on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If these problems happen, repair the file using [Recover
Image DB].
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Recover Image DB] → [Enter].
Note
If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.
Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [Recover Image DB].
309
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Audio signals
Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:all:
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
On:Shutter Only:
Only the shutter sound is produced.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.
Note
If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.
310
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Write Date] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Records a shooting date.
Off:
Does not record a shooting date.
Note
If you shoot images with the date once, you cannot delete the date from the images later.
The dates are doubly printed if you set the product to print dates when printing the images using PCs or printers.
The recorded time of the image cannot be superimposed on the image.
[ Write Date] is not available for RAW images.
311
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Tile Menu
Selects whether to always display the first screen of the menu when you press the MENU button.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Tile Menu] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Always displays the first screen of the menu (Tile Menu).
Off:
Deactivates the Tile Menu display.
312
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Mode Dial Guide
You can display the description of a shooting mode when you turn the mode dial and change the settings available for
that shooting mode.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Mode Dial Guide] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the Mode Dial Guide.
Off:
Does not display the Mode Dial Guide.
313
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set the time by which the power goes off automatically.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.
Menu item details

30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min
Note
The power save function is deactivated in the following situations:
While power is being supplied via USB
While playing back slideshows
While recording movies
While connected to a computer or TV
When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]
314
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],
you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard:
Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.
High:
Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].
Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.
Continuous recording time for movies when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording is as follows when the camera starts recording with the
default settings after the power has been turned off for a while. The following values indicate the continuous time from
when the camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.
Ambient temperature: 20°C (68°F)

Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 30 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 30 minutes
HD: XAVC S HD (60p 50M/50p 50M, when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi)
4K: XAVC S 4K (24p 60M/25p 60M, when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi)
Note
Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable
time for movies may not change.
Related Topic
315
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
NTSC/PAL Selector
Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]
Note
If you insert a memory card that has previously been formatted with a different video system, a message telling you that you must
reformat the card will appear.
If you want to record using another system, re-format the memory card or use another memory card.
When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one, a message "Running on NTSC." or
"Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.
316
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately),
you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p:
Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
Note
If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either [1080i], [1080p] or [2160p/1080p], based on which
TV is to be connected.
317
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [ Record Setting] is set to [24p 50M], [24p 60M]
or [24p 100M].
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → [1080p] or [2160p/1080p].
2 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ 24p/60p Output] → desired setting.
Menu item details

60p:
Movies are output as 60p.
24p:
Note
Steps 1 and 2 can be set in either order.
Related Topic
318
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable
(sold separately).
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s
monitor.
Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on
the camera’s monitor.
Note
When the camera is connected to an HDMI device while [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], the setting switches to [Off].
319
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal via the HDMI terminal when outputting
the signal to other professional-use devices.
This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The product sends the time code information
as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to the digital data to
recognize the time data.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ TC Output] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Time code is output to other devices.
Off:
Time code is not output to other devices.
Note
320
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the recorder/player to start/stop
recording using the camera.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ REC Control] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The camera can send a recording command to an external recorder/player.
The camera is sending a recording command to an external recorder/player.
Off:
The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to start/stop recording.
Note
Available for external recorders/players compatible with [ REC Control].
When you use the [ REC Control] function, set the shooting mode to (Movie).
When [ TC Output] is set to [Off], you cannot use the [ REC Control] function.
Even when is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of the
recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.
321
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can
operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.
2 Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.
The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.
3 Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.
4 Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.
Menu item details

On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.
[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also, the SYNC MENU operation differs depending on
the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to another
manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].
322
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
USB Connection
Selects the USB connection method when this product is connected to a computer, etc.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off] beforehand.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Connection] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be
connected. Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are
enabled for use.
Mass Storage:
Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or
Windows 10 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
PC Remote:
Uses Imaging Edge (Remote) to control the product from a computer, including such functions as shooting and storing
images on the computer.
Note
It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].
Related Topic
323
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
USB LUN Setting
Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.
324
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
USB Power Supply
Sets whether to supply power via the micro USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Power is supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc. If you use
the supplied AC Adaptor, power will be supplied even when [Off] is selected.
Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable

The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.
A checkmark indicates that the operation is available, and “―” indicates that the operation is unavailable.
Operation Available / Unavailable
Shooting images
Playing back images
Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth connections
Charging a battery pack ―
Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted ―
Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.
325
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting
is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.
* PC Remote: Uses Imaging Edge (Remote) to control the product from a computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on
the computer.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [PC Remote Settings] → [Still Img. Save Dest.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

PC Only:
Saves still images only on the computer.
PC+Camera:
Saves still images on the computer and the camera.
Camera Only :
Saves still images only on the camera.
Note
If you insert a memory card that is not recordable, you cannot shoot still images even if you select [Camera Only] or
[PC+Camera].
If you select [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera] and you have not inserted a memory card into the camera, you cannot release the
shutter even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].
While you are playing back still images on the camera, you cannot shoot using PC Remote.
Related Topic
USB Connection
Release w/o Card
326
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer in PC Remote shooting.
When shooting still images using PC Remote, the application on the computer does not display the image until the
image has been completely transferred. When performing RAW+JPEG shooting, you can accelerate the display
processing speed by transferring only JPEG images instead of transferring both RAW and JPEG images.
the computer.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [PC Remote Settings] → [RAW+J PC Save Img] → desired setting.
Menu item details

RAW & JPEG:
Transfers both RAW and JPEG files to the computer.
JPEG Only:
Transfers only JPEG files to the computer.
RAW Only:
Transfers only RAW files to the computer.
Note
[RAW+J PC Save Img] can be set only when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG].
Related Topic
USB Connection
327
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Language
Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [ Language] → desired language.
328
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Date/Time Setup
The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time or when the internal
rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when setting the date and time after the first time.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
Date Format:
Selects the date and time display format.
Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more
with the power off.
If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your
service facility.
329
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Area Setting
Sets the area where you are using the product.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area Setting] → desired area.
330
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Copyright Info
Writes copyright information onto the still images.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.
2 When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the screen. Enter your
desired name.
Menu item details

Write Copyright Info:
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], an icon will appear on the shooting screen.
Set Photographer:
Sets the photographer name.
Set Copyright:
Sets the copyright holder name.
Disp. Copyright Info:
Displays the current copyright information.
Note
You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright]. You can enter up to 46
letters.
A icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.
In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns
before lending out or handing over your camera.
Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].
Related Topic
331
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Version
Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,
etc.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Version].
Note
Updating can be performed only when the battery level is (3 remaining battery bars) or more. Use a sufficiently charged
battery pack.
332
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Demo Mode
The [Demo Mode] function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration), when the
camera has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select [Off].
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Demo Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The movie playback demonstration starts automatically if the product is not operated for about one minute. Only
protected AVCHD movies can be played back.
Set the view mode to [AVCHD View], and protect the movie file with the oldest recorded date and time.
Off:
Does not show the demonstration.
Note
You can set this item only when the product is powered by the AC Adaptor (supplied).
When there is no protected AVCHD movies on the memory card, you cannot select [On].
333
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Setting Reset
Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.
Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.
Settings of [Picture Profile] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.
334
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Imaging Edge Mobile
Using the smartphone application Imaging Edge Mobile, you can shoot an image while controlling the camera using a
smartphone or transfer the images recorded on the camera to the smartphone. Download and install the application
Imaging Edge Mobile from your smartphone’s application store. If Imaging Edge Mobile is already installed on your
smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Imaging Edge Mobile, refer to the support page (https://www.sony.net/iem/).
Note
Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen displays are subject to change without notice.
335
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Sets the condition for connecting the camera to a smartphone.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Ctrl w/ Smartphone:
Sets whether to connect the camera and a smartphone using Wi-Fi. ([On]/[Off])
Connection:
Displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.
Always Connected:
Sets whether to keep the camera connected to a smartphone. If this item is set to [On], once you connect the camera to
a smartphone, it will remain connected to the smartphone at all times. If it is set to [Off], the camera will connect to a
smartphone only when the connection procedure is performed.
Note
If [Always Connected] is set to [On], the power consumption will be greater than when it is set to [Off].
Related Topic
336
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can connect this product to an NFC-enabled smartphone by touching them together and then operate the product
using the smartphone.
Make sure that [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On] by selecting MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone].
1 Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.
On an iPhone/iPad, launch Imaging Edge Mobile, and then select [Scan NFC/QR Code of the Camera] →
[Scan NFC of the Camera] to activate the NFC function.
2 Switch this product to shooting mode.
The NFC function is available only when the (N-Mark) is displayed on the screen.
3 Keep touching the smartphone to the camera for 1 to 2 seconds.
The smartphone and the camera are connected.
You can shoot an image via remote control while checking the composition of the image on the Imaging Edge
Mobile screen.
About “NFC”
NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between various devices, such as mobile phones
or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data communication simpler with just a touch on the designated touch-point.
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless communication technology.
Note
If you cannot make a connection, do as the following:
Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone slowly toward the (N-Mark) of this
product.
If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.
If the product is in a case, remove it.
Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone.
337
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do
this, the location information link function is not available.
When you record movies using a smartphone as a remote controller, the monitor of the product becomes darker.
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].
If this product and the smartphone are connected when the product is in playback mode, the displayed image is sent to the
smartphone.
Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Airplane Mode
338
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can control this product using your smartphone by connecting your smartphone to the camera using the QR Code.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [ Connection].
QR Code (A) and the SSID (B) are displayed on the monitor of this product.
2 Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and select [Scan QR Code of the Camera].
3 Select [OK] on the smartphone screen.
When a message is displayed, select [OK] again.
4 Read the QR Code displayed on the monitor of this product with the smartphone.
Once the QR Code has been read, a message [Connect with the camera?] will be displayed on the smartphone
screen.
5 Select [OK] on the smartphone screen.

The smartphone is connected to the product.
You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the smartphone screen.
Hint
Once the QR Code has been read, this product's SSID (DIRECT-xxxx) and password are registered to the smartphone. This
enables you to easily connect the smartphone to the product via Wi-Fi at a later date by selecting the SSID. (Set [Ctrl w/
Smartphone] to [On] in advance.)
Note
If you cannot connect your smartphone to this product using the [One-touch(NFC)] function or QR Code, use the SSID and
password.
339
Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
340
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can control this product using your smartphone by connecting your smartphone to the camera using the SSID and
password.
QR Code is displayed on the monitor of this product.
2 Press the (Delete) button of this product.
This product's SSID and password are displayed on the monitor of this product.
3 Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone.
4 Select the model name of this product (DIRECT-xxxx: xxxx).
5 Input the password that is displayed on this product.
The smartphone is connected to the product.

You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the smartphone screen.
Note
Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
341
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can connect an iPhone or iPad to the camera using the QR Code and operate the camera using the iPhone or iPad.
QR Code (A) and the SSID (B) are displayed on the monitor of this product.
2 Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your iPhone or iPad and select [Scan QR Code of the Camera].
3 Select [OK] on the iPhone or iPad screen.
When a message is displayed, select [OK] again.
4 Read the QR Code displayed on the monitor of this product with the iPhone or iPad.
The iPhone or iPad will connect to the product.

You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the screen of your iPhone or iPad.
Hint
Once the QR Code has been read, this product's SSID (DIRECT-xxxx) and password are registered to the iPhone or iPad. This
enables you to easily connect the iPhone or iPad to the product via Wi-Fi at a later date by selecting the SSID. (Set [Ctrl w/
Smartphone] to [On] in advance.)
Note
If you cannot connect your iPhone or iPad to this product using the QR Code, use the SSID and password.
Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
342
343
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can control the camera using an iPhone or iPad by connecting the iPhone or iPad to the camera using the SSID and
password.
QR Code is displayed on the monitor of this product.
2 Press the (Delete) button of this product.
This product's SSID and password are displayed on the monitor of this product.
3 Select the model name of this product (DIRECT-xxxx: xxxx) on the Wi-Fi setting screen of your iPhone or
iPad.
4 Input the password that is displayed on this product.
344
The iPhone or iPad is connected to the product.
5 Confirm that your iPhone or iPad was connected to the “SSID” shown on this product.
6 Return to the "Home" screen of the iPhone or iPad and launch Imaging Edge Mobile.
You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the screen of your iPhone or iPad.
Note
Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
345
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can transfer still images, XAVC S movies, or high-frame-rate movies to a smartphone and view them. The
application Imaging Edge Mobile must be installed on your smartphone.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Send to Smartphone] → desired setting.
If you press the (Send to Smartphone) button in playback mode, the setting screen for [Send to
Smartphone] will appear.
2 If the product is ready for the transfer, the information screen appears on the product. Connect the
smartphone and the product using that information.
The setting method for connecting the smartphone and the product varies depending on the smartphone.
Menu item details

Select on This Device:
Selects an image on the product to be transferred to the smartphone.
(1) Select from among [This Image], [All with this date] or [Multiple Images].
The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.
(2) If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →
[Enter].
Select on Smartphone:
Displays all images recorded on the product’s memory card on the smartphone.
Note
You can only transfer images that are saved on the camera's memory card.
You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.
For Android smartphone
Start Imaging Edge Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].
For iPhone/iPad
Select Imaging Edge Mobile in the setting menu, and change the image size by [Copy Image Size].
RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.
You cannot send AVCHD format movies.
Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play
smoothly, or there may be no sound.
346
Depending on the format of the still image, movie, or high-frame-rate movie, it may not be possible to play it back on a
smartphone.
This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] with a device that has permission to connect. If you
want to change the device that is permitted to connect to the product, reset the connection information by following these steps.
MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must register the
smartphone again.
While you transfer many images or long movies, we recommend that you supply power to the camera from a wall outlet (wall
socket) using the AC Adaptor (supplied).
Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Airplane Mode
347
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When transferring XAVC S video to a smartphone with [Send to Smartphone], you can set whether to transfer the low-
bit-rate proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [ Sending Target] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Proxy Only:
Transfers only proxy movies.
Original Only:
Transfers only original movies.
Proxy & Original:
Transfers both proxy and original movies.
Note
Related Topic
Proxy Recording
348
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
With just one touch, you can connect this product and an NFC-enabled smartphone, and send an image displayed on
the product screen directly to the smartphone. You can transfer still images, XAVC S movies, and high-frame-rate
movies.
1 Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.
On an iPhone/iPad, launch Imaging Edge Mobile, and then select [Scan NFC/QR Code of the Camera] →
[Scan NFC of the Camera] to activate the NFC function.
2 Display a single image on the product.
3 Keep touching the smartphone to the camera for 1 to 2 seconds.
The product and the smartphone are connected, and then the displayed image is sent to the smartphone.
Before you touch the smartphone, cancel the sleep and lock-screen functions of the smartphone.
The NFC function is available only when the (N-Mark) is displayed on the product.
To transfer two or more images, select MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Send to
Smartphone] to select images. After the connection enabled screen appears, use NFC to connect the product
and the smartphone.
About “NFC”
NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between various devices, such as mobile phones
or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data communication simpler with just a touch on the designated touch-point.
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless communication technology.
Note
For an Android smartphone
349
For iPhone or iPad
Select Imaging Edge Mobile from Settings, and change the image size using [Copy Image Size].
If the Image Index is displayed on the product, you cannot transfer images using the NFC function.
If you cannot make a connection, do as the following:

Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone slowly toward the (N-Mark) of this
product.
If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.
If the product is in a case, remove it.
Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone.
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect the product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].
Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Airplane Mode
350
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can use the application Imaging Edge Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected
with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting
images.
Preparation in advance
To use the location information linking function of the camera, the application Imaging Edge Mobile is required.
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed on the top page of Imaging Edge Mobile, you need to perform the
following steps beforehand.
1. Install Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone.
You can install Imaging Edge Mobile from the application store of your smartphone. If you have already installed
the application, update it to the latest version.
2. Transfer a pre-recorded image to your smartphone using the [Send to Smartphone] function of the camera.
After you transfer an image recorded using the camera to your smartphone, “Location Information Linkage” will
appear on the top page of the application.
Operating procedure
: Operations performed on the smartphone

: Operations performed on the camera
1. : Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen. In steps 2 to 7, the pairing
operation is performed using the camera and the application Imaging Edge Mobile.
If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing
and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application
Imaging Edge Mobile.
2. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].
3. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].
4. : Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed, follow the steps in “Preparation in advance” above.
5. : Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge
Mobile.
6. : Follow the instructions on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge Mobile, and then
select your camera from the list.
7. : Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera.
Pairing of the camera and Imaging Edge Mobile is complete.
351
8. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Location Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].
(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information
obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.
Menu item details

Location Info. Link:
Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Icons displayed when obtaining the location information

(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.
(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not established.
Hint
Location information can be linked when Imaging Edge Mobile is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is
off. However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the
camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Imaging Edge Mobile screen on the
smartphone.
When Imaging Edge Mobile is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Imaging Edge Mobile to resume
location information linking.
If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile.
Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.
For more detailed instructions, refer to the following support page.

https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/
Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To perform pairing again, delete the pairing information for
the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile before trying again.
The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is disconnected.
The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.
If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function of
the smartphone that is already linked.
If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired smartphone.
When pairing the camera and your smartphone, be sure to use the [Location Information Linkage] menu on Imaging Edge Mobile.
To use the location information linkage function, set [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [Off].
The communication distance for Bluetooth or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.
Supported smartphones
Refer to the support page for the latest information.
https://www.sony.net/iem/
352
For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.
Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Bluetooth Settings
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
353
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth remote commander RMT-P1BT (sold separately). Select MENU →
(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] in advance. Refer to the instruction manual for the
Bluetooth remote commander as well.
1 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].
If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 2 will
appear.
2 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] to display the screen for
pairing.
3 On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.
4 On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.
Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing
the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by
setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].
Menu item details

On:
Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Off:
Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Hint
The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.
If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing
again.
paired Bluetooth remote commander.
You cannot use the function for linking location information with a smartphone while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].
While [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On], the camera will not switch to the power-saving mode. Change the setting to [Off] when
you are done using the Bluetooth remote commander.
354
Related Topic
Bluetooth Settings
355
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
View on TV
You can view images on a network-enabled TV by transferring them from the product without connecting the product and
TV with a cable. For some TVs, you may need to perform operations on the TV. For details, refer to the operating
1 MENU → (Network) → [View on TV] → desired device to be connected.
2 When you want to play back images using slideshow, press the center of the control wheel.
To display the next/previous image manually, press the right/left sides of the control wheel.
To change the device to be connected, press the down side of the control wheel, then select [Device list].
Slideshow settings
You can change the slideshow settings by pressing the down side of the control wheel.
Playback Selection:
Selects the group of images to be shown.
Folder View(Still):
Selects from [All] and [All in Folder].
Date View:
Selects from [All] and [All in Date Rng.].
Interval:
Selects from [Short] and [Long].
Effects*:
Selects from [On] and [Off].
Playback Image Size:
Selects from [HD] and [4K].
* The settings are effective only for BRAVIA TV which is compatible with the functions.
Note
You can use this function on a TV that supports DLNA renderer.
You can view images on a Wi-Fi Direct-enabled TV or network-enabled TV (including wired network-enabled TVs).
If you connect TV and this product and do not use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to register your access point first.
Displaying the images on the TV may take time.
Movies cannot be shown on a TV via Wi-Fi. Use an HDMI cable (sold separately).
When [Display as Group] is set to [On], only the first image of the group is transferred to the TV.
356
Related Topic
357
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Airplane Mode
When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.
If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.
358
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.
1 MENU → (Network) →[Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push].
2 Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.
Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-
Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is set to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].
For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or contact
the administrator of the access point.
A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such
as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,
change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.
Related Topic
359
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,
security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point
operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Access Point Set.].
2 Select the access point you want to register.
When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access
point.
If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.
3 Input the password, and select [OK].
Access points without the mark do not require a password.
4 Select [OK].
Other setting items

Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.
WPS PIN:
Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.
Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].
IP Address Setting:
360
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway:
If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.
Note
To give the registered access point priority in the future, set [Priority Connection] to [On].
Related Topic
361
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Displays the Wi-Fi MAC address of this product.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Disp MAC Address].
362
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
This product shares connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection] under [Ctrl w/ Smartphone]
with devices that have permission to connect. If you want to change the devices that are permitted to connect, reset the
connection information.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].
Note
If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the
smartphone again.
Related Topic
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
363
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Bluetooth Settings
Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander via a Bluetooth
connection.
If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information link function, refer to “Location
Info. Link Set..”
If you want to perform pairing in order to use a Bluetooth remote commander, refer to “Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl.”
1 MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Bluetooth Function (On/Off):
Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera.
Pairing:
Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.
Disp Device Address:
Displays the BD address of the camera.
Related Topic
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
364
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Edit Device Name
You can change the device name for the Wi-Fi Direct or Bluetooth connection.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Edit Device Name].
2 Select the input box, then input the device name→[OK].
Related Topic
365
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Reset Network Set.
Resets all the network settings to default settings.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Reset Network Set.] → [Enter].
366
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Recommended computer environment
You can confirm the operating computer environment of the software from the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/pcenv/
367
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
PlayMemories Home
With PlayMemories Home, you can do the following:
You can import images shot with this product to your computer.
You can play back the images imported to your computer.
You can share your images using PlayMemories Online.
You can edit movies such as by cutting or merging.
You can add various effects such as BGM and subtitles to movies.
Also for Windows, you can do the following:
You can organize images on the computer on a calendar by shooting date to view them.
You can edit and correct images, such as by trimming and resizing.
You can create a disc from movies imported to a computer.
Blu-ray discs or AVCHD discs can be created from XAVC S-format movies.
You can upload images to a network service. (An Internet connection is required.)
For other details, please refer to the Help of PlayMemories Home.
Related Topic
368
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
1 Using your computer's Internet browser, go to the URL below and download PlayMemories Home by
following the on-screen instructions.
https://www.sony.net/pm/
An Internet connection is required.
For detailed instructions, visit the PlayMemories Home support page.
https://www.sony.co.jp/pmh-se/
2 Connect the product to your computer using the micro USB cable (supplied), then turn the product on.
New functions may be added to PlayMemories Home. Even if PlayMemories Home has already been installed
on your computer, connect this product and your computer again.
Do not remove the micro USB cable (supplied) from the camera while the camera is in operation or the access
screen is displayed. Doing so may damage the data.
A: To the Multi/Micro USB Terminal

B: To the USB jack of the computer
Note
Log on as Administrator.
It may be necessary to restart your computer. When the restart confirmation message appears, restart the computer following the
instructions on the screen.
DirectX may be installed depending on your computer’s system environment.
369
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Connecting to a computer
1 Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.
2 Turn on the camera and the computer.
3 Check that [USB Connection] under (Setup) is set to [Mass Storage].
4 Connect the camera to the computer using the micro USB cable (supplied) (A).
When you connect the camera to the computer for the first time, the procedure for recognizing the camera may
start automatically on the computer. Wait until the procedure is finished.
If you connect the product to your computer using the micro USB cable when [USB Power Supply] is set to
[On], power is supplied from your computer. (Default setting: [On])
Note
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.
Related Topic
USB Connection
USB LUN Setting
370
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home
PlayMemories Home allows you to easily import images. For details on PlayMemories Home functions, see the Help of
PlayMemories Home.
Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home (For Windows)
When the AutoPlay Wizard appears after making a USB connection between this product and a computer, click [Open
folder to view files] → [OK] → [DCIM]. Then copy the desired images to the computer.
Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home (For Mac)
Connect the product to your Mac computer. Double-click the newly recognized icon on the desktop → the folder in which
the image you want to import is stored. Then drag and drop the image file on to the hard disk icon.
Note
For operations such as importing XAVC S movies or AVCHD movies to the computer, use PlayMemories Home.
Do not edit or otherwise process AVCHD or XAVC S movie files/folders from the connected computer. Movie files may be
damaged or become unplayable. Do not delete or copy AVCHD movies or XAVC S movies on the memory card from the
computer. Sony is not held liable for consequences resulting from such operations via the computer.
If you delete images or perform other operations from the connected computer, the image database file may become
inconsistent. In this case, repair the image database file.
371
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Disconnecting the camera from the computer
Perform steps 1 and 2 below before performing the following operations:
Disconnecting the micro USB cable.

Removing a memory card.
Turning off the product.
1 Click (Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media ) in the taskbar.
2 Click the displayed message.
Note
On Mac computers, drag and drop the memory card icon or the drive icon into the “Trash” icon. The camera will be disconnected
from the computer.
On some computers, the disconnection icon may not appear. In this case, you can skip the steps above.
Do not remove the micro USB cable from the camera while the access lamp is lit. The data may be damaged.
372
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Send to Computer
You can transfer images stored in the product to a computer connected to a wireless access point or wireless broadband
router and easily make backup copies using this operation. Before starting this operation, install PlayMemories Home on
your computer and register the access point on the product.
1 Start your computer.
2 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Computer].
Note
Depending on the application settings of your computer, the product will turn off after saving the images to your computer.
You can transfer images from the product to only one computer at a time.
If you want to transfer images to another computer, connect the product and the computer via a USB connection and follow the
instructions in PlayMemories Home.
Proxy movies cannot be transferred.
Related Topic
373
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Imaging Edge
Imaging Edge is a software suite that includes functions such as remote shooting from a computer, and adjusting or
developing RAW images recorded with the camera.
Viewer:
You can display and search images.
Edit:
You can edit images with various corrections such as tone curve and sharpness, and develop images recorded in RAW
format.
Remote:
You can adjust the camera settings or shoot images from a computer connected to the camera with a USB cable.
To control the camera using the computer, select MENU → (Setup) → [USB Connection] → [PC Remote], and then
connect the camera to the computer with a USB cable.
For details on how to use Imaging Edge, refer to the support page.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/
Installing Imaging Edge on your computer

Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/disoft/d/
Related Topic
USB Connection
374
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can create a disc that can be played back on other devices from a movie recorded on this camera.
What devices can play back the disc depends on the disc type. Select a disc type suitable for the playback devices you
will be using.
Depending on the movie type, the movie format may be converted when creating a disc.
High-definition image quality (HD) (Blu-ray Disc)

High-definition image quality (HD) movies can be recorded on a Blu-ray Disc, creating a high-definition image quality
(HD) disc.
A Blu-ray Disc enables you to record longer-duration high-definition image quality (HD) movies than DVD discs.
Writable movie formats: XAVC S, AVCHD
Players: Blu-ray Disc playback devices (Sony Blu-ray Disc players, PlayStation 4, etc.)
High-definition image quality (HD) (AVCHD recording disc)

High-definition image quality (HD) movies can be recorded on DVD media such as DVD-R discs, creating a high-
definition image quality (HD) disc.
Writable movie formats: XAVC S, AVCHD
Players: AVCHD format playback devices (Sony Blu-ray Disc players, PlayStation 4, etc.)
You cannot play these kinds of discs on ordinary DVD players.
Standard definition image quality (STD)

Standard definition image quality (STD) movies converted from high-definition image quality (HD) movies can be
recorded on DVD media such as DVD-R discs, creating a standard image quality (STD) disc.
Writable movie formats: AVCHD
Players: Ordinary DVD playback devices (DVD players, computers that can play back DVD discs, etc.)
Hint
You can use the following types of 12 cm discs with PlayMemories Home.
BD-R/DVD-R/DVD+R/DVD+R DL: Non-rewritable
BD-RE/DVD-RW/DVD+RW: Rewritable
Additional recording is not possible.
Always maintain your “PlayStation 4” to use the latest version of the “PlayStation 4” system software.
Note
4K movies cannot be recorded on a disc in 4K image quality.
Related Topic
375
376
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can create Blu-ray Discs that can be played back on Blu-ray Disc playback devices (such as Sony Blu-ray Disc
players or the PlayStation 4, etc.).
A. How to create using a computer

With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create Blu-ray Discs using PlayMemories
Home.
Your computer must be able to create Blu-ray Discs.
When you create a Blu-ray Disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer using a USB cable. The
necessary software is automatically added to your computer. (An Internet connection is needed.)
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help guide for PlayMemories Home.
B. How to create using a device other than a computer

You can also create Blu-ray Discs using a Blu-ray recorder, etc.
For details, refer to the device's operating instructions.
Note
When creating Blu-ray discs using PlayMemories Home from movies recorded in the XAVC S movie format, the image quality is
converted to 1920×1080 (60i/50i). It is not possible to create discs with the original image quality.
To record movies with the original image quality, copy movies to a computer or an external medium.
Related Topic
377
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from high-definition image quality
movies
You can create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) that can be played back on AVCHD-compatible playback devices
(such as Sony Blu-ray Disc players or the PlayStation 4, etc.).

With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create DVD discs (AVCHD recording
discs) using PlayMemories Home.
Your computer must be able to create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs).
When you create a DVD disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer using a USB cable. The necessary
software is automatically added to your computer. (An Internet connection is needed.)
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help guide for PlayMemories Home.

You can also create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) using a Blu-ray recorder, etc.
Note
When creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) using PlayMemories Home from movies recorded in the XAVC S movie
format, the image quality is converted to 1920×1080 (60i/50i). It is not possible to create discs with the original image quality.
To record movies with the original image quality, copy movies to a computer or an external medium.
When creating AVCHD recording discs using PlayMemories Home from movies recorded in the AVCHD movie format with [
Record Setting] set to [60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)], the image quality is converted and it is not possible to create discs with the
original image quality. This conversion can take a long time. To record movies with the original image quality, use a Blu-ray Disc.
Related Topic
378
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can create DVD discs that can be played back on ordinary DVD playback devices (DVD players, computers that can
play back DVD discs, etc.).

With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create DVD disc using PlayMemories
Home.
Your computer must be able to create DVD discs.
When you create a DVD disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer using a USB cable. Install the
dedicated add-on software following the on-screen instructions. (An internet connection is needed.)
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help for PlayMemories Home.

You can also create DVD discs using a Blu-ray recorder, HDD recorder, etc.
Related Topic
379
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Using MENU items
You can change settings related to all the camera operations including shooting, playback, and operating method. You
can also execute camera functions from the MENU.
1 Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.
2 Select the desired setting you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.
Select a MENU tab (A) at the top of the screen, and press the left/right side of the control wheel to move to
another MENU tab.
You can move to the next MENU tab by pressing the Fn button.
You can go back to the previous screen by pressing the MENU button.
3 Select the desired setting value, and press the center to confirm your selection.
Related Topic
Tile Menu
Add Item
380
381
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the file format for still images.
Menu item details

RAW:
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for
professional purposes.
RAW & JPEG:
A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files, a JPEG
for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
JPEG:
The image is recorded in the JPEG format.
About RAW images

To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge is needed. With Imaging Edge, you
can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or readjust the white
balance, saturation or contrast of the image.
You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.
RAW images shot by the camera are recorded in the compressed RAW format.
Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG format.
You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.
Related Topic
382
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Selects the JPEG image quality when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [JPEG].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Quality] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Extra fine/Fine/Standard:
Since the compression rate increases from [Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard], the file size decreases in the same order.
This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality is lower.
Related Topic
383
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The
smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Image Size] → desired setting.
Menu item details
L︓20M 5472×3648 pixels
M︓10M 3888×2592 pixels
S︓5.0M 2736×1824 pixels
L︓18M 4864×3648 pixels
M︓10M 3648×2736 pixels
S︓5.0M 2592×1944 pixels
VGA 640×480 pixels
L︓17M 5472×3080 pixels
M︓7.5M 3648×2056 pixels
S︓4.2M 2720×1528 pixels
L︓13M 3648×3648 pixels
M︓6.5M 2544×2544 pixels
S︓3.7M 1920×1920 pixels
Note
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image size for RAW images corresponds to “L.”
Related Topic
384
385
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.
Menu item details

3:2:
Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film
4:3:
16:9:
1:1:
The horizontal and vertical ratio is equal.
386
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Panorama: Size
Sets the image size when shooting panoramic images. The image size varies depending on the [Panorama: Direction]
setting.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Size] → desired setting.
Menu item details

When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Up] or [Down]
Wide: 5536×2160
When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Left] or [Right]

Wide: 12416×1856
Related Topic
Sweep Panorama
Panorama: Direction
387
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Panorama: Direction
Sets the direction to pan the camera when shooting panoramic images.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Direction] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Right:
Pan the camera from the left to the right.
Left:
Pan the camera from the right to the left.
Up:
Pan the camera from the bottom to the top.
Down:
Pan the camera from the top to the bottom.
Related Topic
Sweep Panorama
388
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When you set the shutter speed to 1/3 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the
duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction is in progress, a message
appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
[ Long Exposure NR] is not available when [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
Noise reduction may not be activated even if [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following situations:
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], [Cont. Bracket] or [Single Burst Shoot.].
The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action], [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] is selected.
[ Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
Depending on the shooting conditions, the camera may not perform noise reduction, even if the shutter speed is 1/3 second(s) or
longer.
389
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product
sensitivity is high.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ High ISO NR] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
[ High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.
[ High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].
390
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color
space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Color Space] → desired setting.
Menu item details

sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print
out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe
RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”
Note
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be
printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.
When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be
displayed with low saturation.
391
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
This camera is equipped with the following two automatic shooting modes: [Intelligent Auto] and [Superior Auto]. You can
switch the auto mode to shoot according to the subject and your preferences.
1 Set the mode dial to .
2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Auto Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Intelligent Auto:
Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition.
Superior Auto:
Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition. This mode takes clear images of dark or backlit scenes.
Note
In [Superior Auto] mode, the recording process takes longer, since the product creates a composite image. In this case, the
In [Superior Auto] mode and when the (overlay icon) is displayed, be sure not to move the camera before the multiple shots
are recorded.
For [Intelligent Auto] and [Superior Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on
your own.
Related Topic
Intelligent Auto
Superior Auto
392
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Scene Selection
1 Set the mode dial to SCN (Scene Selection).
Menu item details

Portrait:
Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.
Sports Action:
Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots
images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
Macro:
Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.
Landscape:
Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.
Sunset:
Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.
393
Night Scene:
Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
Hand-held Twilight:
Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is
applied to reduce subject blur, camera-shake, and noise.
Night Portrait:
Shoots night scene portraits using the flash.
The flash does not pop up automatically. Pop up the flash manually before shooting.
Anti Motion Blur:

Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and
combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
Pet:
Allows you to shoot images of your pet with the best settings.
Gourmet:
Allows you to shoot food arrangements in delicious and bright colors.
394
Fireworks:
Allows you to shoot images of fireworks in all their splendor.
High Sensitivity:
Allows you to shoot still images even in dark locations without using the flash, and reduces subject blur. Also allows you
to shoot dark movie scenes more brightly.
Hint
To change the scene, rotate the control wheel on the shooting screen and select a new scene.
Note
Under the following settings, the shutter speed is slower, so use of a tripod, etc. is recommended to prevent the image from
blurring:
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]
[Fireworks]
In the [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] mode, the shutter clicks 4 times and an image is recorded.
If you select [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] with [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], [ File Format] becomes [JPEG]
temporarily.
Reducing blur is less effective even in [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] when shooting the following subjects:
Subjects with erratic movement.
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, a beach, or a lawn.
In the case of [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur], block noise may occur when using a light source that flickers, such as
fluorescent lighting.
The minimum distance that you can come close to a subject does not change even if you select [Macro]. For the minimum in-
focus range, refer to the minimum distance of the lens attached to the product.
Related Topic
Using flash
395
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Drive Mode
Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.
1 Select / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.
Menu item details

Single Shooting :
Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting :
Single Burst Shoot. :
Captures seven consecutive still images at a higher speed than with [Cont. Shooting]. The speed reaches a maximum of
90 images per second.
Self-timer :
pressed.
Self-timer(Cont) :
the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket :
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of exposure.
Single Bracket :
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degrees of exposure.
WB bracket :
DRO Bracket :
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action] is selected, [Single Shooting] cannot be performed.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Single Burst Shoot.
Self-timer
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
396
DRO Bracket
397
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to use the self-timer for [Single Burst Shoot.] under [Drive Mode].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Single Burst Self-timer] → desired mode.
2 Press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel.

[Single Burst Shoot.] → Select the desired speed for [Single Burst Shoot.] using the right/left side of the
control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.
The self-timer lamp will flash, a beep will sound, and shooting will start after the designated number of seconds
have elapsed.
Menu item details

Off :
Does not use the self-timer during [Single Burst Shoot.].
2 Sec :
5 Sec :
10 Sec :
Note
Press the shutter button again or press / on the control wheel to stop the self-timer countdown.
Related Topic
Single Burst Shoot.
398
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Bracket Settings
You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance
bracketing.
1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → select bracket shooting mode.
2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Selftimer during Bracket:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released
if using the self-timer.
(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)
Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
399
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in
advance (Interval shooting). You can then create a movie from the still images produced by interval shooting using the
computer software Imaging Edge (Viewer). You cannot create a movie from the still images on the camera.
For details on interval shooting, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/dsc/l/dsc-rx100m7/interval.php
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].
2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → Select the item you want to set and the
desired setting.
3 Press the shutter button.

When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.
When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen
Menu item details

Interval Shooting:
Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])
Shooting Start Time:
Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59
seconds)
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second
to 60 seconds)
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
AE Tracking Sensitivity:
Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select
[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])
Shutter Type in Interval:
Sets the shutter type during interval shooting. ([Mechanical Shutter]/[Electronic Shutter])
Shoot Interval Priority:
Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]
and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([On]/[Off])
Hint
If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen
To go back to the normal shooting mode, select MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval
Shooting] → [Off].
If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will
remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.
400
[AEL hold]
[ AEL hold]
[AF/MF Control Hold]
[Regist. AF Area hold]
[AWB Lock Hold]
[My Dial 1 during Hold] to [My Dial 3 during Hold]
If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.
Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the
still images, you can preview the result.
Note
You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space
on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.
When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able
to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.
During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the
dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed by using
the customized control ring or control wheel.
During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.
[Shutter Type in Interval] is set to [Electronic Shutter] as a default, regardless of the setting for [ Shutter Type].
Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

The shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M
Selectable shutter speeds may differ depending on the setting for [Shutter Type in Interval].
Related Topic
Imaging Edge
401
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with [ /
Memory] in advance.
1 Set the mode dial to MR (Memory recall).
2 Press the left/right side of the control wheel or turn the control wheel to select the desired number, then
You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [
/ Recall].
Hint
To recall settings registered to the memory card, set the mode dial to MR (Memory recall), then select the desired number by
pressing the left/right side of the control wheel.
Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.
Note
If you set [ / Recall] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the
original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.
Related Topic
402
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the
memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.
1 Set the product to the setting you want to register.
2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ / Memory] → desired number.
3 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.
Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed
Optical zoom scale
To change registered settings

Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.
Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.
Program Shift cannot be registered.
Related Topic
403
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Mode
Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

(Single-shot AF):
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
(Automatic AF):
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject. When the shutter button is
pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to
focus when the subject is in motion. During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with Continuous AF
from the second shot.
(Continuous AF):
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is
in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.
(DMF):
(Manual Focus):
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use manual focus.
Rotate the control ring to adjust the focus manually in the direct manual focus mode or manual focus mode.
Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.
Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus

Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
Back-lit subjects
Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances
Hint
When you set the focus to infinity in the manual focus mode or the direct manual focus mode, make sure that the focus is on a
sufficiently distant subject by checking the monitor or the viewfinder.
404
Note
Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available when shooting movies or when the mode dial is set to .
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Phase detection AF
405
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Area
Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to focus properly in the auto focus mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Wide :
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway
down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.
Zone :
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
Center :
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the
composition you want.
Flexible Spot :
Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a
narrow area.
On the Flexible Spot shooting screen, you can change the size of the focusing frame by turning the control wheel.
Expand Flexible Spot :
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority
area for focusing.
Tracking:
When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus
area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to [Continuous AF]. Point the cursor at [Tracking] on the
[Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control
wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or
expand flexible spot. On the Flexible Spot shooting screen, you can change the size of the focusing frame by turning the
control wheel.
To move the focus area

When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], if pressing the button to which [Focus
Standard] is assigned, you can shoot while moving the focusing frame using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the
control wheel. To return the focusing frame to the center of the monitor, press the button while moving the frame.
To change the shooting settings using the control wheel, press the button to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.
You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On],
and set [Func. of Touch Operation] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.
To track the subject temporarily (Tracking On)

You can temporarily change the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking] while you press and hold down the custom key to
which you have assigned [Tracking On] in advance. The [Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On] will
switch to the equivalent [Tracking] setting.
For example:
[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]
406
[Flexible Spot: S] [Tracking: Flexible Spot S]
[Expand Flexible Spot] [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
Note
[Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
During Smile Shutter mode
The mode dial is set to (Movie) and [Auto Dual Rec] is set to [On].
The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.
When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or or during movie shooting, [Tracking] cannot be selected as the [Focus Area].
When [Subject Detection] for [Face/Eye AF Set.] is set to [Animal], [Tracking] cannot be selected as the [Focus Area].
You cannot execute functions assigned to the control wheel or the C button while moving the focusing frame.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
407
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Area Limit
By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [Focus Area].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas that you
want to use, and then select [OK].
The types of focus areas marked with will be available as settings.
Note
Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,
add a check mark using [Focus Area Limit].
If you remove the check mark for a focus area registered with [ Switch V/H AF Area] or [ AF Area Registration], the
registered settings will change.
Related Topic
Focus Area
408
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)

(Switch V/H AF Area)
You can set whether to switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the
camera (horizontal/vertical). This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to change the camera
position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Switch V/H AF Area] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
AF Point Only:
Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [Focus
Area] is fixed.
AF Point + AF Area:
Switches both the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
An example when [AF Point + AF Area] is selected
(A) Vertical: [Flexible Spot] (Upper left corner)

(B) Horizontal: [Flexible Spot] (Upper right corner)
(C) Vertical: [Zone] (Lower left corner)
Three camera orientations are detected: horizontal, vertical with the side of the shutter button facing up, and vertical
with the side of the shutter button facing down.
Note
If the setting for [ Switch V/H AF Area] is changed, the focus settings for each camera orientation will not be retained.
The [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame will not change even when [ Switch V/H AF Area] is set to [AF Point
+ AF Area] or [AF Point Only] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Movie], or [High Frame Rate]
While the shutter button is pressed halfway down
During movie shooting
While the auto-focusing is activated
During continuous shooting
During the countdown for the self-timer
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated
When you shoot images right after the power is turned on and the camera is vertical, the first shot is taken with the horizontal
focus setting or with the last focus setting.
409
The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.
Related Topic
Focus Area
410
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. In the time between pressing
the shutter button halfway down and locking the focus, the AF illuminator lights up to allow the camera to focus easily.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Illuminator] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
The AF illuminator lights up automatically in dark surroundings.
Off:
Does not use the AF illuminator.
Note
You cannot use [ AF Illuminator] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is [Movie] or [High Frame Rate].
Sweep Panorama
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is moving (when the focus indicator or
lights up).
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated.
When [Scene Selection] is set to the following modes:
[Landscape]
[Sports Action]
[Night Scene]
[Pet]
[Fireworks]
The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard, do not look directly into the AF illuminator at close
range.
411
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Face/Eye AF Set.
This function is used to determine whether or not the camera will focus with priority on faces or eyes.
There are two ways to perform [Eye AF].
Focusing on the eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

Focusing on the eyes by pressing the custom key. For details on using the custom key to perform [Eye AF], refer to
the explanation below (▼).
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → desired setting item.
Menu item details

Face/Eye Priority in AF :
Sets whether or not to detect faces or eyes inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is
activated. ([On]/[Off])
(Note: The camera operations are different when using the custom key to execute [Eye AF].)
Subject Detection :
Selects the target to be detected.
[Human]: Detects human faces/eyes.
[Animal]: Detects animal eyes. Animal faces are not detected.
Right/Left Eye Select :
Specifies the eye to be detected when [Subject Detection] is set to [Human]. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is selected, only
the selected eye is detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], [Right/Left Eye Select] cannot be used.
[Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.
[Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
[Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
Face/Eye Frame Display :
Sets whether or not to display the face/eye detection frame when a human face or eyes are detected. ([On]/[Off])
Animal Eye Display :
Sets whether or not to display the eye detection frame when the eye of an animal is detected. ([On]/[Off])
Face detection frame

When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When the product determines that autofocus is
enabled, the face detection frame turns white.
In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the product automatically selects
the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over that face turns white. The face detection frames of other
registered faces turn reddish-purple.
412
Eye detection frame
A white eye detection frame appears when an eye is detected and the camera determines that autofocusing is possible,
depending on the settings.
The eye detection frame is displayed as follows when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal].
[Eye AF] by custom key

The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning [Eye AF] to a custom key. The camera can focus on eyes as long as
you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen
regardless of the setting for [Focus Area]. The camera does not focus automatically if no faces or eyes are detected.
(Note: When you try to focus on eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down, the camera only detects faces or
eyes inside the focus area designated with [Focus Area]. If the camera detects no faces or eyes, it performs normal
auto-focusing.)
1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign the [Eye
AF] function to the key.
2. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Subject Detection] → desired setting.
3. Point the camera at the face of a human or animal, and press the key to which you have assigned the [Eye AF]
function.
To shoot a still image, press the shutter button while pressing the key.
[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key

When [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch the eye to be detected by pressing the
custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom
key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to
automatic eye detection.
Pressing the center of the control wheel
Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)
Stopping pressing the custom key to which [Eye AF] is assigned (only during still image shooting)
Pressing the MENU button
Hint
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is not set to [Auto], or you execute [Switch Right/Left Eye] using the custom key, the eye detection
frame appears. Even when [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], if [Face/Eye Frame Display] is set to [On], the eye detection
frame will appear over detected eyes during movie shooting.
If you want the face or eye detection frame to disappear within a certain period of time after the camera has focused on the face
or eye, set [AF Area Auto Clear] to [On].
To detect animal eyes, arrange the composition so that both eyes and the nose of the animal are within the angle of view. Once
you focus on the animal’s face, the animal’s eyes will be detected more easily.
413
Note
When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human], the eyes of animals are not detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal],
human faces are not detected.
When [Scene Selection] is set to [Portrait], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On], and [Subject Detection] is locked to
[Human].
When [Scene Selection] is set to [Pet], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On], and [Subject Detection] is locked to [Animal].
When [Smile Shutter] is set to [On], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On], and [Subject Detection] is locked to [Human].
When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the following functions cannot be used.
Tracking function
Soft Skin Effect
The [Eye AF] function may not function very well in the following situations:
When the person is wearing sunglasses.
When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.
In low-light or back-lit conditions.
When the eyes are closed.
When the subject is in the shade.
When the subject is out of focus.
When the subject is moving too much.
If the subject is moving too much, the detection frame may not be displayed correctly over their eyes.
Depending on the circumstances, the eyes cannot be focused.
When the camera cannot focus on human eyes, it will detect and focus on the face instead. The camera cannot focus on eyes
when no human faces are detected.
When recording movies with [Subject Detection] set to [Animal], you cannot use the eye detection function.
The eye detection frame is not displayed when the Eye AF function is unavailable.
You cannot use the face/eye detection function with the following functions:
Zoom functions other than the optical zoom.
[Sweep Panorama]
[Posterization] under [Picture Effect]
Focus Magnifier
When [Scene Selection] is set to [Landscape], [Night Scene], or [Sunset]
Movie shooting with [ Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p]
When shooting with a high frame rate.
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M],
and [ 4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI]
Even if [Face/Eye Frame Display] or [Animal Eye Display] is set to [Off], a green focusing frame will be displayed over faces or
eyes that are in focus.
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto] or [Superior Auto], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On].
Even when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the eyes of some types of animals cannot be detected.
Related Topic
Focus Mode
Focus Area
AF Area Auto Clear
414
415
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down. During focusing operations,
the screen may shake.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Pre-AF] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
416
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when
shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you
can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.
How to register focus area

1. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Area Registration] → [On].
2. Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.
How to call up the registered focus area

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired key, then select [Regist. AF Area hold].
2. Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and
then press the shutter button to shoot images.
Hint
When a focusing frame is registered using [ AF Area Registration], the registered focusing frame flashes on the monitor.
If you assign [Regist AF Area tggle] to a custom key, you can use the registered focusing frame without holding down the key.
Note
A focus area cannot be registered in the following situations:
The mode dial is set to either (Movie) or
While [Touch Focus] is being performed
While [Touch Tracking] is being performed
While focusing
While performing focus lock
You cannot assign [Regist. AF Area hold] to [Left Button] or [Right Button].
You cannot call up the registered focus area in the following situations:
The mode dial is set to either (Auto Mode), (Movie) or
When [ AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the [Wheel Lock] setting is locked to [Unlock].
Related Topic
Focus Area
417
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using [ AF Area Registration].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Del. Regist. AF Area].
Related Topic
418
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Frame Color
You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,
make it more visible by changing its color.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Frame Color] → desired color.
Menu item details

White:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.
Red:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.
419
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
AF Area Auto Clear
Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is
achieved.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.
420
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Disp. cont. AF area
You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], in
[Continuous AF] mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Disp. cont. AF area] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.
Note
When [Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center]
[Flexible Spot]
[Expand Flexible Spot]
421
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Phase Detect. Area
Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Phase Detect. Area] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the Phase Detection AF area.
Off:
Does not display the Phase Detection AF area.
Note
When the F-value is larger than F8, Phase Detection AF cannot be used. Only Contrast AF is available.
When recording movies, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed.
422
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame with
[Focus Area] set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. This function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the
other quickly.
1 MENU→ (Camera Settings1)→[Circ. of Focus Point] → desired setting.
When [Circulate] is selected:
Menu item details

Does Not Circulate :
The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Circulate :
The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Related Topic
Focus Area
423
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Exposure Comp.
Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can
make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation).
1 (Exposure Comp.) on the control wheel → press the left/right side of the control wheel or turn the
control wheel, and select the desired setting.
+ (over) side:
Images become brighter.
- (under) side:
Images become darker.
You can also select MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Comp.].
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -3.0 EV to +3.0 EV.
You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.
Monitor
Viewfinder
424
Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.
If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory
effect.
Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Zebra Setting
425
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
ISO Setting: ISO
Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher
the sensitivity.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multi Frame NR:
Combines continuous shots to create an image with less noise. Press the right side to display the setting screen, then
select a desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
Select the desired ISO number from ISO AUTO or ISO 100 – ISO 25600.
ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 64 – ISO 12800:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.
Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right
side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum]. The values are also
applied when shooting in [ISO AUTO] mode under [Multi Frame NR].
You can set the effect level for noise reduction by selecting [NR Effect] under [Multi Frame NR].
Note
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.
When [Multi Frame NR] is selected, the flash, [D-Range Optimizer], or [Auto HDR] cannot be used.
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.
[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following functions:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]
When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may
decrease.
The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.
The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting movies, or using HFR.
ISO values between 64 and 6400 are available in the following situations:
[ Shutter Type] is set to [Auto] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting]
[Multi Frame NR] is not available when [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Single Burst Shoot.].
When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 12800 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 100, the
setting is automatically switched to 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.
426
When you use [Multi Frame NR], it takes some time for the product to perform the overlay processing of images.
When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted
within the set range.
427
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set manually.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO Range Limit] → [Minimum] or [Maximum], and
select the desired values.
To set the range for [ISO AUTO]

If you want to adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically set in the [ISO AUTO] mode, select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO] → [ISO AUTO], and then press the right side of the control wheel to select
[ISO AUTO Maximum]/[ISO AUTO Minimum].
Note
ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range become unavailable. To select ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified
range, reset [ISO Range Limit].
Related Topic
ISO Setting: ISO
428
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
If you select [ISO AUTO] or [ISO AUTO] under [Multi Frame NR] when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A
(Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing camera
shake.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.
Menu item details

FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake and
subject blurring.
STD (Standard):
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with less
noise.
1/32000 ― 30":
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.
Hint
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower]
is 1 EV.
Note
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with
an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].
In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
When the maximum shutter speed has changed based on the [ Shutter Type] setting.
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes with the [ Shutter Type] set to [Electronic Shutter]. (The maximum shutter
speed is limited to the flash-syncing speed of 1/100 second.)
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the
speed automatically determined by the camera.)
Related Topic
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
ISO Setting: ISO
429
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Metering Mode
Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the
entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-
weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire
screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the
metering circle depends the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position
of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the
subject while avoiding overexposure.
Hint
When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be
coordinated with the focus area.
When [Multi] is selected and [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on detected
faces.
When [Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] or [Auto HDR] function is activated, the brightness and
the contrast will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow.
Make settings based on the shooting circumstances.
Note
[Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.
Related Topic
AE lock
Spot Metering Point
430
Auto HDR
431
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
Off:
The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto] or [Superior Auto], [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].
When [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is set to [On] and [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal] under [Face/Eye AF Set.], [Face Priority in
Multi Metering] does not work.
Related Topic
Metering Mode
432
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Spot Metering Point
Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot],
[Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Center:
The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link:
The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.
Note
When [Focus Area] is set to other than [Flexible Spot]/[Expand Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Expand Flexible
Spot], the spot metering position is locked to the center.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot], the spot metering position coordinates
to the tracking start position, but does not coordinate with the tracking of the subject.
Related Topic
Focus Area
Metering Mode
433
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AEL w/ shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [Focus
Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF], and the product determines that the
subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is cancelled.
On:
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust
focus and exposure separately.
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.
Note
When [AEL toggle] is assigned to any key using [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], operation using the key will be given
priority over the [AEL toggle] settings.
434
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering mode.
2 Select the desired value as the metering standard.
You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.
Metering Mode
The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in MENU → (Camera
Settings1) → [Metering Mode].
Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Average/ Highlight
Note
The exposure compensation will not be affected when [Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.
The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [ Spot] during using spot AEL.
The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust].
The value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure compensation value. The amount of
exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure compensation value.
If you set [Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing will be reset.
Related Topic
Metering Mode
435
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Flash Mode
You can set the flash mode.
1 Select (Flash Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.
You can also set the flash mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Mode].
Menu item details

Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the
subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you
to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.
Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.
Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.
Related Topic
Using flash
436
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Flash Comp.
Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light
only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.
Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level
lower.
Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Scene Selection]
The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the
maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.
Related Topic
Using flash
437
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Red Eye Reduction
When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Off:
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.
Note
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and conditions, such as distance to
the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.
438
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
White Balance
Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when
the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose
for photographic expression.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy / Incandescent / Fluor.: Warm White /
Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White / Fluor.: Daylight / Flash / Underwater Auto :
When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light
source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the
color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for
photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
Hint
You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side
If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.
or is displayed only when [Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].
Note
[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the
characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].
Related Topic
Priority Set in AWB
WB bracket
439
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Priority Set in AWB
Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [White Balance]
is set to [Auto].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
Related Topic
White Balance
440
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and
the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [D-Range Optimizer].
Menu item details

D-Range Optimizer: Auto:
D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:
Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5
(strong).
Note
In the following situations, [DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off]:
Multi Frame NR
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off]
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]
[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when the following modes are selected in [Scene Selection].
[Sunset]
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]
[Hand-held Twilight]
[Anti Motion Blur]
[Fireworks]
The setting is fixed to [D-Range Optimizer: Auto] when [Scene Selection] modes other than the above modes are selected.
When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p 100M], [100p 100M], [120p 60M], or [100p 60M], [DRO/Auto HDR] switches to [Off].
When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,
especially when you enhance the effect.
441
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Auto HDR
Shoots three images using different exposures and combines the images with correct exposure, the bright parts of an
underexposed image, and the dark parts of an overexposed image to create images with a greater range of gradation
(High Dynamic Range). One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [Auto HDR].
Menu item details

Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ― Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:
Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimization level from 1.0EV (weak) to
6.0EV (strong).
For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed with the following exposure levels:
-1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0 EV.
Hint
The shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:
Do not change the composition before shooting.
Note
This function is not available when the [ File Format] is [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Scene Selection]
[Auto HDR] is not available in the following situations:

When [Multi Frame NR] is selected.
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you shoot.
You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of a subject and the shooting conditions.
When the flash is used, this function has little effect.
When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur occurs, you may not obtain good HDR images.
will be displayed over the recorded image to inform you when the camera detects image blurring. Change the
composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.
442
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Creative Style
Allows you to set the desired image processing and finely adjust contrast, saturation and sharpness for each image
style. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you like with this function, unlike with [Scene Selection],
where the product adjusts the exposure.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Creative Style].
2 Select the desired style or [Style Box] using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
3 To adjust (Contrast), (Saturation) and (Sharpness), select the desired item using the right/left
sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.
4 When selecting [Style Box], move to the right side using the right side of the control wheel, and then select
the desired style.
(A): Displayed only when Style Box is selected
Menu item details

Standard:
For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,
spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral:
443
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing
image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear:
For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
Deep:
For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
Light:
For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
Portrait:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape:
The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also
stand out more.
Sunset:
For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene:
The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves:
For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Style Box):
Select the six style box (the boxes with numbers on the left side ( )) to register preferred settings. Then select the
desired settings using the right button.
To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]

[Contrast], [Saturation], and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each image style preset such as [Standard] and
[Landscape], and for each [Style Box] to which you can register preferred settings.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides
Contrast:
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on
the image.
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is
restrained and subdued.
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value
selected, the more the contours are softened.
Note
[Creative Style] is fixed to [Standard] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
[Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
When this function is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.
444
445
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Picture Effect
Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Effect] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera:
Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color:
Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization:
Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo:
Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key:
Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color:
Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.:
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Soft Focus:
Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
HDR Painting:
Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
Rich-tone Mono.:
Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
Miniature:
Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused considerably. This effect may often
be found in pictures of miniature models.
Watercolor:
Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
Illustration:
Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.
Hint
You can perform detailed settings for some items using the left/right sides of the control wheel.
Note
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom scale larger makes [Toy Camera] less effective.
When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.
You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the product processes the image after the shot. Also, you
cannot shoot another image until image processing is finished. You cannot use these effects with movies.
[Soft Focus]
[HDR Painting]
446
[Rich-tone Mono.]
[Miniature]
[Watercolor]
[Illustration]
In the case of [HDR Painting] and [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the
following:
Do not change the composition during shooting.
When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or subject blur has occurred, you may not be able to
obtain good HDR images. If the product detects such a situation, appear on the recorded image to inform you of this
situation. Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.
This function is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function is not available.
447
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Picture Profile
Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc. For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html.
Customizing the picture profile

You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and [Detail]. When setting
these parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → the profile you want to change.
2 Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.
3 Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
4 Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press in the center.
Using the preset of the picture profile
The default settings [PP1] through [PP10] for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting
conditions.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → desired setting.
PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma.
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma.
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma.
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5:
PP6:
PP7:
Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma.
PP8:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3.Cine] under [Color Mode].
PP9:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3] under [Color Mode].
PP10:
Example setting for recording HDR movies using [HLG2] gamma.
HDR movie recording

The camera can record HDR movies when a gamma from [HLG], [HLG1] to [HLG3] is selected in the picture profile.
Picture profile preset [PP10] provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using [PP10] can be
viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG).
448
This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or
over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program production, as defined in the international standard Recommendation
ITU-R BT.2100.
Items of the picture profile
Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)
Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie.
(equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after
shooting.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the
picture will be processed after shooting.
HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower
dynamic range than with [HLG2] or [HLG3].
HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than [HLG2]. However, noise may increase.
[HLG1], [HLG2], and [HLG3] all apply a gamma curve with the same characteristics, but each offers a different
balance between dynamic range and noise reduction. Each has a different maximum video output level, as follows:
[HLG1]: approx. 87%, [HLG2]: approx. 95%, [HLG3]: approx. 100%.
Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
[Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))
Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity
areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
[Knee] is disabled if [Mode] is set to [Auto] when [Gamma] is set to [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], [S-
Log3], [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3]. To enable [Knee], set [Mode] to [Manual].
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.
Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode ].

Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)
Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].

Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))
449
Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
In [Color Mode], only [BT.2020] and [709] are available when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1] or [Cine2].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709
gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set
to [S-Log2].
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when
[Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital
cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is
set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
BT.2020: Standard color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
709: Color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] and movies are recorded with HDTV color
(BT.709).
Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)
Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)
Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for
achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you
decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)
Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to
the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower
DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)
To copy the settings to another picture profile number

You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Copy].
450
To reset the picture profile to the default setting
You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Reset].
Note
Since the parameters are shared for movie and still images, adjust the value when you change the shooting mode.
If you develop RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth
When the [ Record Setting] is [120p 100M]/[100p 100M] or [120p 60M]/[100p 60M], [Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot
be adjusted.
If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.
When using S-Log2 or S-Log3 gamma, the noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using other gammas. If the noise
still is significant even after processing pictures, it may be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic
range becomes narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by
test shooting when using S-Log2 or S-Log3.
Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, perform
custom setup with a gamma other than [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], or [S-Log3] first, and then reselect [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2],
or [S-Log3] gamma.
Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] disables the [Black Level] setting.
If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set] under [Knee], [Knee] will be disabled.
S-Gamut, S-Gamut3.Cine, and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this camera's S-Gamut setting does not
support the whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.
Related Topic
Gamma Disp. Assist
451
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly in the Face Detection function.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Soft Skin Effect] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the [ Soft Skin Effect] function.
On:
Uses the [ Soft Skin Effect].
Hint
When [ Soft Skin Effect] is set to [On], you can select the effect level. Select the effect level by pressing the right/left side of
the control wheel.
Note
[ Soft Skin Effect] is not available when [ File Format] is [RAW].
[ Soft Skin Effect] is not available for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].
452
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when [White Balance] is set to
[Auto] or [Underwater Auto].
This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the
shutter button pressed halfway down.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Shutter AWB Lock] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Shut. Halfway Down:
Locks the white balance while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The
white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.
Cont. Shooting:
Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.
Off:
Operates with the normal auto white balance.
About [AWB Lock Hold] and [AWB Lock Toggle]

You can also lock the white balance in the auto white balance mode by assigning [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle]
to the custom key. Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [
Custom Key]. If you press the assigned key during shooting, the white balance will be locked.
The [AWB Lock Hold] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment while the
button is pressed.
The [AWB Lock Toggle] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment after the
button is pressed once. When you press the button again, the AWB lock is released.
If you want to lock the white balance during movie shooting in the auto white balance mode, select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [ Custom Key].
Hint
When you shoot with the flash while the automatic white balance is locked, the resulting color tones may be unnatural because
the white balance was locked before the flash was emitted. In this case, set [ Shutter AWB Lock] to [Off] or [Cont. Shooting],
and do not use the [AWB Lock Hold] function or [AWB Lock Toggle] function when shooting. Alternatively, set [White Balance] to
[Flash].
Related Topic
White Balance
453
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Magnifier
You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [ MF Assist], you can magnify the image without operating the control ring.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].
2 Press the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge using
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.
You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus
Mag.].
3 Confirm the focus.

Press the (Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. The [Focus
Magnifier] function will be canceled when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Focus Magnif. Time].
4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.
To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation

You can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
Then, select the appropriate settings under [Touch Panel/Pad]. When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can
perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on while shooting with the monitor.
While shooting with the viewfinder, a frame is displayed in the center of the monitor by double-tapping and you can move
the frame by dragging it. The image is magnified by pressing the center of the control wheel.
Hint
While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.
To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. You can also exit the focus magnifier function by pressing the
shutter button halfway down.
Related Topic
Focus Magnif. Time
Touch Operation
454
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Focus Magnif. Time
Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [ MF Assist] or [Focus Magnifier] function.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.
Menu item details

2 Sec:
5 Sec:
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
455
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.
Menu item details

x1.0:
x5.3:
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
456
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus shooting.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ MF Assist] → [On].
2 Turn the control ring to adjust the focus.
The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.
Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif.
Time].
Note
You cannot use [ MF Assist] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Focus Magnif. Time
457
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Peaking Setting
Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Peaking Display:
Sets whether to display peaking.
Peaking Level:
Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas.
Peaking Color:
Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas.
Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject.
The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
458
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
If you register faces in advance, the product can focus on the registered face as a priority.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].
2 Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
3 When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].
Note
Up to eight faces can be registered.
Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask,
sunglasses, etc.
Related Topic
Smile Shutter
459
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will be given priority. You can change the
priority order.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Order Exchanging].
2 Select a face to change the order of priority.
3 Select the destination.
Related Topic
Smile Shutter
460
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Deletes a registered face.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Delete].
If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.
Note
Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the data for registered faces from
the product, select [Delete All].
461
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Regist. Faces Priority] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Focuses with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].
Off:
Focuses without giving higher priority to registered faces.
Hint
To use the [Regist. Faces Priority] function, set as follows.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [On]
[Subject Detection] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [Human]
Related Topic
Face/Eye AF Set.
462
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Smile Shutter
The camera automatically shoots an image when it detects a smiling face.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Smile Shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the [Smile Shutter] function.
On:
The camera automatically shoots an image when it detects a smiling face. You can select [On: Slight Smile], [On: Normal
Smile], or [On: Big Smile] for the sensitivity of detection.
Tips for capturing smiles more effectively
Do not cover the eyes with front hair and keep the eyes narrowed.
Do not obscure the face by a hat, masks, sunglasses, etc.
Try to orient the face in front of the product and be as level as possible.
Give a clear smile with an open mouth. The smile is easier to be detected when the teeth are shown.
If you press the shutter button during Smile Shutter, the product shoots the image. After shooting, the product returns
to Smile Shutter mode.
Note
You cannot use the [Smile Shutter] function with the following functions:
[Sweep Panorama]
[Picture Effect]
When using the [Focus Magnifier] function.
[Scene Selection] is set to [Landscape], [Night Scene], [Sunset], [Hand-held Twilight], [Anti Motion Blur], [Pet], [Gourmet] or
[Fireworks].
If the product cannot detect a smile, adjust the Smile Detection Sensitivity.
If [Func. of Touch Operation] is set to [Touch Tracking] and you touch a face on the monitor to track while [Smile Shutter] is active,
smile detection will only apply to that face.
463
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When this product detects and shoots faces, macro shooting subjects or subjects that are tracked by [Tracking], the
product automatically trims the image into an appropriate composition, and then saves it. Both the original and the
trimmed images are saved. The trimmed image is recorded in the same size as the original image size.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Auto Object Framing] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not trim images.
Auto:
Automatically trims images into an appropriate composition.
Note
The trimmed image may not be the best possible composition, depending on the shooting conditions.
[ Auto Object Framing] cannot be set when [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[ Auto Object Framing] is not available in the following situations.

The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama]
The shooting mode is set to [Movie]
The shooting mode is set to [High Frame Rate]
The shooting mode is set to [Hand-held Twilight], [Sports Action], [Anti Motion Blur] in [Scene Selection]
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], [Single Burst Shoot.], [Self-timer(Cont)], [Cont. Bracket], [Single Bracket], [WB bracket],
or [DRO Bracket].
When shooting in Manual Focus mode
[Picture Effect] is set to [Soft Focus], [HDR Painting], [Rich-tone Mono.], [Miniature], [Watercolor], or [Illustration].
464
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can change the angle of the monitor and shoot images while watching the monitor.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Self-portrait/ -timer] → [On].
2 Tilt the monitor approximately 180° upward, and then point the lens at yourself.
3 Press the shutter button. Alternatively, touch the subject on the monitor.
The product starts the self-timer shooting after three seconds.
Hint
If you want to use another Drive Mode than the 3-second self-timer mode, first set [Self-portrait/ -timer] to [Off], then tilt the
monitor upward approx. 180 degrees.
465
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting.
1 Set the mode dial to (Movie).
2 MENU→ (Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.
3 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.
Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
Menu item details

Program Auto:
Aperture Priority:
Shutter Priority:
Manual Exposure:
466
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can select the exposure mode for HFR shooting based on the subject and effect you want.
2 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Program Auto:
Aperture Priority:
Shutter Priority:
Manual Exposure:
Related Topic
467
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
File Format (movie)
Selects the movie file format.
Menu item details
File Characteristics
Format
XAVC
S 4K You can save movies on a computer using the
PlayMemories Home software.
XAVC Records movies in crisper quality than AVCHD
S HD with larger amounts of data.
The AVCHD format has a high degree of You can save movies on a computer or create a disc that
AVCHD compatibility with storage devices other than supports this format using the PlayMemories Home
computers. software.
Note
When recording XAVC S 4K or XAVC S HD movies in 120p/100p, the amount of time available for continuous recording is
approximately 5 minutes. The remaining time for movie recording is displayed on the monitor. However, when [Auto Power OFF
Temp.] is set to [High], you can record movies continuously for over 5 minutes. If you want to record another session of 4K or HD
120p/100p movie shooting, turn off the camera and wait for some time before you start the next session of shooting. Even if the
recording time was less than 5 minutes, recording may stop to protect the camera, depending on the temperature of the shooting
environment.
When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx.
2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
468
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Selects the frame rate and bit-rate for movie recording.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Record Setting] → desired setting.
The higher the bit-rate, the higher the image quality.
Menu item details

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]
Record
Setting

50M Mbps

25M Mbps

50M Mbps

16M Mbps
Approx. 50
24p 50M * Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
Mbps

120p 100M/100p Approx. 100
devices.
469
Record
Setting

120p 60M/100p Approx. 60
devices.
60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX) 24 Mbps at maximum Records movies in 1920×1080 (60i/50i).
60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH) Approx. 17 Mbps on average Records movies in 1920×1080 (60i/50i).
Note
Creating an AVCHD recording disc from movies that were recorded with [60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)] as the [ Record Setting]
takes a long time because the image quality of movies is converted. If you want to store movies without converting them, use a
Blu-ray Disc.
[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
470
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
By shooting with a higher frame rate than the recording format, you can record a smooth super-slow-motion movie.
The shooting setting screen will be displayed.
2 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ HFR Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record
Setting], [ Frame Rate], [ Priority Setting], and [ REC Timing].
You can adjust the desired exposure mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2)→[ Exposure
Mode].
3 Point the camera at the subject and adjust settings such as the focus.
You can also change other settings, such as focus mode, ISO sensitivity, etc.
The focus becomes locked once the camera enters the shooting standby, even when using the auto focus. If
you cannot focus on the intended subject using the auto focus, use the manual focus.

The shooting setting screen will close and the camera will switch to the shooting standby.
You cannot adjust the exposure, adjust the focus, operate the zoom, etc. during the shooting standby. If you
want to change the shooting settings, press the center of the control wheel again to return to the shooting
setting screen.
5 Press the MOVIE (Movie) button.
When [ REC Timing] is set to [Start Trigger]:

Movie capturing (shooting) starts. When the MOVIE button is pressed again, or when the recordable duration of
time has elapsed, movie capturing ends and the camera starts to record the captured movie to the memory card.
471
When [ REC Timing] is set to [End Trigger] or [End Trigger Half]:
Movie capturing ends and the camera starts to record the captured movie to the memory card.
Menu item details

Record Setting :
Selects the frame rate of the movie from [60p 50M]/[50p 50M], [30p 50M]/[25p 50M], and [24p 50M*].
Frame Rate :
Selects the shooting frame rate from [240fps]/[250fps], [480fps]/[500fps], and [960fps]/[1000fps].
Priority Setting :
Select from [Quality Priority] which prioritizes the image quality and [Shoot Time Priority] which prioritizes the duration of
time of the movie.
REC Timing :
Selects whether to record for a set amount of time after you press the MOVIE button ([Start Trigger]), or for a set amount
of time until you press the MOVIE button ([End Trigger]/[End Trigger Half]).
Frame rate
In super-slow-motion movie shooting, the camera shoots at a faster shutter speed than the number of shooting frames
per second. For example, when [ Frame Rate] is set to [960fps], the shutter speed per frame will be faster than
approx. 1/1000 second in order to shoot 960 frames per second. To maintain this shutter speed, sufficient ambient light is
necessary during shooting. If the ambient light is insufficient, the ISO sensitivity will become higher, resulting in more
noise.
Shortest shooting distance

The image becomes out of focus when the subject is too close, such as during macro shooting. Shoot from the shortest
shooting distance (W side: approximately 8 cm (0.27 ft), T side: approximately 100 cm (3.29 ft) (from the lens)) or further.
Timing of recording
Depending on the [ REC Timing] setting, the relationship between when you press the MOVIE button and the
recorded section of the movie is as shown below.
[Start Trigger]
Movie capturing (shooting) starts when the MOVIE button is pressed. When the MOVIE button is pressed again, or when
the recordable duration of time has elapsed, movie capturing ends and the camera starts to record the captured movie to
the memory card.

[End Trigger]/[End Trigger Half]

Buffering (temporarily capturing a movie on the camera) starts once the camera enters the shooting standby. When the
captured data fills the buffering capacity, old data is overwritten sequentially. When you press the MOVIE button, the
camera starts to record a movie of the set duration calculated retroactively from that point on the memory card.
472
With [End Trigger], a movie of the maximum possible duration is recorded. With [End Trigger Half], a movie of half
the maximum possible duration is recorded. With [End Trigger Half], the time it takes to record to the memory card is
also shorter than with [End Trigger].
End Trigger
End Trigger Half

(D): Buffering in progress
To redo shooting
You can cancel recording by selecting [Cancel] on the screen. However, the movie recorded up to the point you
cancelled will be saved.
Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Frame Rate] and [ Record Setting].
Record Setting
Frame Rate
24p 50M* 30p 50M/25p 50M 60p 50M/50p 50M
[ Priority Setting] and shooting duration

Shooting duration
Quality Priority 480fps/500fps 1824×616

Approx. 3 seconds
960fps/1000fps 1244×420
Shoot Time 240fps/250fps 1824×616 Approx. 7 seconds

Priority
473
Shooting duration
Approx. 7 seconds/Approx. 6
480fps/500fps 1292×436
seconds
Playback time
For example, if you shoot for approx. 4 seconds with [ Record Setting] set to [24p 50M]*, [ Frame Rate] set to
[960fps], and [ Priority Setting] set to [Shoot Time Priority], the playback speed will be 40 times slower and the
playback time will be approx. 160 seconds (approx. 2 minutes and 40 seconds).
Note
Sound will not be recorded.
The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format.
It may take time for recording to finish after you press the MOVIE button. Wait until the camera enters the shooting standby to
start the next session of shooting.
Related Topic
474
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Quality(Dual Rec)
Selects the quality of still images to be shot while recording movies.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Quality(Dual Rec)] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Extra fine/Fine/Standard
475
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Img. Size(Dual Rec)
Selects the size of still images to be shot while recording movies.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Img. Size(Dual Rec)] → desired setting.
Menu item details

L: 17M/M: 7.5M/S: 4.2M
476
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Auto Dual Rec
Sets whether or not to automatically shoot still images when shooting movies. Shoots when impressive compositions,
including people, are detected. This function may also record versions of the automatically shot images that have been
trimmed into optimal compositions. When a trimmed image is recorded, both the image before trimming and the trimmed
image will be recorded.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Auto Dual Rec] → desired setting.
2 Press the MOVIE button to start movie recording.
Still images will be shot automatically. While capturing a still image, the message [CAPTURE] is displayed on
the monitor.
3 Press the MOVIE button again to finish movie recording.
To view the movies and still images recorded, press the (Playback) button.
Menu item details

Off:
Auto Dual Rec is not performed.
On: Shoot. Frequency Low/On: Shoot. Frequency Standard/On: Shoot. Frequency High:
Auto Dual Rec is performed with the specified shooting frequency.
The positions, orientation, expressions of faces are detected in order to shoot still images with the impressive
compositions.
Hint
If you want to change the size or quality of still images, use MENU → (Camera Settings2)→[Img. Size(Dual
Even when [Auto Dual Rec] is set to On, you can record still images by pressing the shutter button.
Note
Depending on the recording conditions, still images may not be shot with the optimal timing.
Auto Dual Rec is unavailable when shooting movies vertically.
Related Topic
Quality(Dual Rec)
Img. Size(Dual Rec)
477
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Proxy Recording
Sets whether to simultaneously record low-bit-rate proxy movies when recording XAVC S movies. Since proxy movies
are small in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Proxy Recording] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On :
Proxy movies are simultaneously recorded.
Off :
Proxy movies are not recorded.
Hint
Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format (1280×720) at 9 Mbps. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as
that of the original movie.
Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen). is displayed
over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.
Note
Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.
Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]
When [ SteadyShot] is set to [Intelligent Active]
Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot
delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.
Movies cannot be edited on this camera.
Related Topic
478
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF drive speed] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Fast:
Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
Normal:
Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
Slow:
Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is
changed.
Note
When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p], [ AF drive speed] cannot be used.
479
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set the AF sensitivity in movie mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF Tracking Sens.]→desired setting.
Menu item details

Responsive:
Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
Standard:
Sets the AF sensitivity to normal. This mode is useful when there are obstacles in front of the subject or in crowded
places.
Note
When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p], [ AF Tracking Sens.] cannot be used.
480
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise
in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off:
Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record
movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
Note
[ Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:
(Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]
481
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.
Menu item details

x1.0:
x4.0:
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
482
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Audio Recording
Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the
camera operating.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Records sound (stereo).
Off:
Does not record sound.
483
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Audio Rec Level
You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Rec Level].
2 Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.
Menu item details

+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.
Reset:
Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.
Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record
more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make
the sound easier to hear.
Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.
[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.
[Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during High Frame Rate shooting.
The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the (microphone) terminal input.
484
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Audio Level Display
Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the audio level.
Off:
Does not display the audio level.
Note
The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:
When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].
When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].
The audio level is also displayed while shooting stand-by in movie recording mode.
485
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Wind Noise Reduct.
Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.
Note
Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal sound to be recorded with too low volume.
When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.
486
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
SteadyShot (movie)
Sets [ SteadyShot] effect when shooting movies. If you set the [ SteadyShot] effect to [Off] when using a tripod
(sold separately), a natural image is produced.
Menu item details

Intelligent Active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect than [Active].
Active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
Standard:
Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
Off:
Note
If you change the setting for [ SteadyShot], the angle of view will change.
[Intelligent Active] cannot be selected when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K].
Related Topic
487
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to display markers set using [ Marker Settings] on the monitor or the viewfinder while shooting
movies.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.
Off:
No marker is displayed.
Note
The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to ( Movie) or when shooting movies.
You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].
The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the markers.)
Related Topic
488
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Center:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.
[Off]/[On]
Aspect:
Sets the aspect marker display.
[Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV.
[Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
[Off]/[On]
Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.
Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced composition.
489
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Movie w/ shutter
You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the
MOVIE (Movie) button.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Movie w/ shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or during High Frame Rate
shooting.
Off:
Disables movie recording using the shutter button.
Hint
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can still start or stop recording movies using the MOVIE button.
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external
recording/playback device using [ REC Control].
Related Topic
Shooting movies
490
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.
1 MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[ Shutter Type]→desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
The shutter type is automatically switched based on the shooting conditions and shutter speed.
Mechanical Shutter:
Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.
Electronic Shutter:
Shoot with the electronic shutter only.
Hint
In the following situations, set the [ Shutter Type] to [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter].
When shooting with a high-speed shutter in a bright environment such as outside in bright sunlight, the beach, or snowy
mountains.
When you want to increase the speed of continuous shooting.
In the following situations, set the [ Shutter Type] to [Auto] or [Mechanical Shutter].
When you want to use the flash with a shutter speed faster than 1/100 second.
When you are concerned about distortion in the image due to the movement of the subject or the movement of the camera.
Note
When shooting with the electronic shutter, there may be distortion in the image due to the movement of the subject or the camera
itself.
During shooting with the electronic shutter, band-like light-and-dark shading may appear when shooting under flickering light such
as fluorescent light or instantaneous light (such as the flash of another camera).
In rare cases, the shutter sound may be produced when the power is turned off even if the [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic
Shutter]. However, this is not a malfunction.
In the following situations, the mechanical shutter will be activated even if the [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
When capturing a standard white color for the custom white balance
[Face Registration]
The following functions are unavailable when the [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
Long Exposure NR
Bulb shooting
Related Topic
491
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Release w/o Card
Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.
Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.
The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.
492
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.
Menu item details

On:
Uses [ SteadyShot].
Off:
We recommend that you set the camera to [Off] when using a tripod.
Related Topic
SteadyShot (movie)
493
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Zoom Setting
You can select the zoom setting of the product.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [ JPEG Image Size] to
[M], [S] or [VGA].
ClearImage Zoom :
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies
images using an image process with less deterioration.
Digital Zoom :
When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale.
However, the image quality will deteriorate.
Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.
Related Topic
About zoom scale
494
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Zoom Speed
Sets the zoom speed of the camera's zoom lever.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Speed] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Normal:
Sets the zoom speed of the zoom lever to normal.
Fast:
Sets the zoom speed of the zoom lever to fast.
Hint
The [Zoom Speed] settings are also used when you are zooming with a remote controller (sold separately) connected to the
camera.
Note
Selecting [Fast] increases the likelihood that the zoom sound will be recorded.
Related Topic
Zoom
495
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Zoom Func. on Ring
Sets the zoom functions when using the control ring to change zoom scales. The settings for [Zoom Func. on Ring] are
valid only when auto-focusing.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Func. on Ring] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard:
Zooms in/out smoothly when you operate the zoom by turning the control ring.
Quick:
Zooms in/out to an angle of view corresponding to how far the control ring has been rotated.
Step:
Zooms in/out at certain angle steps when you operate the zoom by turning the control ring.
Note
In the following situations, the zoom function activates as if [Zoom Func. on Ring] is set to [Standard], even if it is set to [Step].
When using the W/T (zoom) lever to change the zoom scale.
When using zoom functions other than the optical zoom.
When the shooting mode is set to something other than [Intelligent Auto] or [Superior Auto], assign the [Zoom] function to the
control ring before using the control ring.
Selecting [Quick] increases the likelihood that the zoom sound will be recorded.
Related Topic
496
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] or [Finder] → desired setting → [Enter].
The items marked with are available.
Menu item details

Graphic Display :
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information.
Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in
either direction, the indicator turns to green.
For viewfinder*:
Displays only shooting information on the monitor, not the subject. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the
viewfinder.
Monitor Off*:
Always turns the monitor off when shooting images. You can use the monitor when playing back images or operating
MENU. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the viewfinder.
* These screen modes are available only in the setting for [Monitor].
Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.
The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.
497
Related Topic
498
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
FINDER/MONITOR
Sets the method for switching the display between the viewfinder and the monitor.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [FINDER/MONITOR] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
When you look into the viewfinder, the eye sensor reacts and the display is switched to the viewfinder automatically.
Viewfinder(Manual):
The monitor is turned off and the image is displayed only in the viewfinder.
Monitor(Manual):
The viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the monitor.
Hint
You can assign the [FINDER/MONITOR] function to your preferred key.
MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to
the preferred key.
If you want to retain the viewfinder display or the monitor display, set [FINDER/MONITOR] to [Viewfinder(Manual)] or
[Monitor(Manual)] beforehand.
You can keep the monitor off when you take your eyes off the viewfinder during recording by setting the monitor display to
[Monitor Off] using the DISP button. Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] and add a check
mark to [Monitor Off] beforehand.
Note
When the viewfinder is pushed down, the images are always displayed on the monitor regardless of the [FINDER/MONITOR]
setting.
When the monitor is pulled out, the eye sensor will not detect your eye's approach even if the viewfinder is popped up and
[FINDER/MONITOR] is set to [Auto]. The image will continue to be displayed on the monitor.
Related Topic
499
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Zebra Setting
Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you
have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zebra Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Zebra Display:
Sets whether to display the zebra pattern.
Zebra Level:
Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern.
Hint
You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [Zebra Level]. The
settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom1] and [Custom2] respectively
in the default settings.
To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on
areas that fall within the range you set.
To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a
brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.
Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.
500
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Grid Line
Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Grid Line] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the
composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.
501
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Exposure Set. Guide
You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Exposure Set. Guide] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not display the guide.
On:
Displays the guide.
502
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Live View Display
Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style],
or [Picture Effect] on the screen.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Live View Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Setting Effect ON:
Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This
setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen.
Setting Effect OFF:
Displays Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect].
When this setting is used, you can easily check the image composition.
Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.
When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the icon is displayed on the Live View screen.
Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the
composition.
Note
[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Movie]
[High Frame Rate]
[Scene Selection]
When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the
displayed Live View.
Even if [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], when you use the electrical shutter, images will look as if your settings
were applied.
503
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Shoot. Start Disp.
Sets whether or not to indicate the shutter release timing with a black screen during blackout-free shooting. The black
screen makes it easier to visually confirm when the shutter is released.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Start Disp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The screen blacks out when shooting the first image during blackout-free shooting.
Off:
The screen does not black out when shooting the first image during blackout-free shooting.
Related Topic
Single Burst Shoot.
504
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to display marks (such as a frame) on the screen while shooting. This function is useful in situations
where it is difficult to determine the timing of shooting just by looking at the screen, such as when the shutter sound is
turned off.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Timing Disp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On: Type1:
Displays a frame (dark color) around the focusing frame.
On: Type2:
Displays a frame (light color) around the focusing frame.
On: Type3:
Displays (dark color) in the four corners of the screen.
On: Type4:
Displays (light color) in the four corners of the screen.
Off:
Does not display the shutter release timing during blackout-free shooting.
[On: Type1] / [On: Type2] (Example: [Focus Area] is set to [Center])
[On: Type3] / [On: Type4]
Related Topic
Single Burst Shoot.
505
506
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Auto Review
You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto
Review.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Auto Review] → desired setting.
Menu item details

10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a
magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.
Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by
the image after processing.
The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.
Related Topic
507
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable keys. This lets
you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly. You can also assign
[Not set] to easily operable keys to prevent accidental operation.
You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode ( Custom Key), movie
shooting mode ( Custom Key), and playback mode ( Custom Key).
Assignable functions vary depending on the keys.
You can assign functions to the following keys.
1. Control Ring
2. Fn/ Button
3. Center Button /Left Button/Right Button
4. C Button
Hint
You can recall functions more quickly by using the Function menu to configure each setting directly from the Fn button, along with
the custom keys. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
The following is the procedure for assigning the [Eye AF] function to the C button.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key].
If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [ Custom Key]. If you want to assign
a function to recall while playing back images, select [ Custom Key].
2 Move to the [Rear] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [C Button] and press
the center of the control wheel.
508
3 Press the left/right side of the control wheel until [Eye AF] is displayed. Select [Eye AF], and then press the
center.
If you press the C button in the still image shooting mode and eyes are detected, [Eye AF] will activate, and the
camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the C button.
Note
If you assign [Follow Custom ( )] to a custom key using [ Custom Key], but the function is one that is unavailable in the
movie shooting mode such as [ JPEG Quality] or [Flash Mode], the function will not be recalled when you press the key in the
movie shooting mode.
If you assign [Follow Custom ( / )] to a custom key using [ Custom Key], the camera will switch to the shooting mode
and recall the assigned function when you press the key in the playback mode.
Related Topic
509
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn
(Function) button in the shooting mode. You can access frequently used functions more quickly by registering them to
the function menu.
Hint
You can register twelve functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.
You can recall functions more quickly by using the custom key function to assign frequently used functions to desired keys, along
with the function menu. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
1 Press the DISP on the control wheel repeatedly to display a screen mode other than [For viewfinder], and
then press the Fn (Function) button.
510
3 Select the desired setting by turning the control wheel or the control ring, and press the center of the
control wheel.

To change the functions in the function menu (Function Menu Set.)

The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the still image function menu to [Grid Line].
To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Function Menu Set.].

2. Select (Drive Mode) from among the twelve still image function menu items using the top/bottom/left/right
side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
3. Move to the [Display/Auto Review] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [Grid Line] and
(Grid Line) will be displayed in the former location of (Drive Mode) in the function menu.
Related Topic
511
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can assign the desired functions to the control ring and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of
settings as “My Dial” settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by pressing the custom key
you assigned in advance.
Registering functions to “My Dial”

Register the functions that you want to assign to the control ring and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through [My Dial 3].
1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [My Dial Settings].

2. Select a ring or wheel for (My Dial 1), and press the center of the control wheel.
3. Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
Select “--” (Not set) for a ring or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.
4. After you select functions for all of the ring and the wheel in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select [OK].
The settings for (My Dial 1) will be registered.
If you want to register (My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3) as well, follow the same procedure as described above.
Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”

Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → Select the key that you want to use
to recall “My Dial.”
2. Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”
Menu item details
My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold:
While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in [My Dial Settings] are assigned to the ring/wheel.
My Dial 1→2→3 :
Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: “Normal function → Function of My Dial 1
→ Function of My Dial 2 → Function of My Dial 3 → Normal function.”
Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3:
The function registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again
to return to the normal function.
Shooting while switching “My Dial”

During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning
the control ring/control wheel.
In the following example, the functions listed below are registered to "My Dial," and [My Dial 1→2→3] is assigned to the
C (Custom) button.
512
Control wheel ISO Tv Creative Style
Control ring Av White Balance Picture Effect
1. Press the C (Custom) button.

The functions registered to [My Dial 1] will be assigned to the control wheel/control ring.
The icons shown below are displayed in the lower part of the screen.
2. Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, and turn the control ring to set the aperture value.
3. Press the C button again. The functions registered to [My Dial 2] will be assigned to the control wheel/control ring.
4. Turn the control wheel to set the shutter speed, and turn the control ring to set [White Balance].
5. Press the C button again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to [My Dial 3].
6. Press the shutter button to shoot.
Note
“My Dial” settings in which every ring/wheel is set to [Not set] are not recalled when you press the custom key. They are also
skipped in [My Dial 1→2→3].
Even if a control wheel has been locked using the [Wheel Lock] function, it will be unlocked temporarily when “My Dial” is
recalled.
Related Topic
513
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Av/Tv Rotate
Sets the direction of rotation for the control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Av/Tv Rotate] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Normal:
Does not change the direction of rotation for the control wheel.
Reverse:
Reverses the direction of rotation for the control wheel.
514
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
Set MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] to [On] in advance.
1 Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Shutter].
2 Touch the icon inside the rectangle in the top right of the monitor while the shooting screen is
displayed.
The mark to the left of the icon turns orange, and the touch shutter function is activated.
To cancel [Touch Shutter], touch the icon again.

The touch shutter function is canceled when the camera is restarted.
3 Touch the subject to focus on.
When the subject you touched is in focus, a still image is recorded.
Hint
You can operate the shooting functions below by touching the monitor:
Shooting burst images using the touch shutter
When [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], you can record burst images while touching the monitor.
Shooting burst images of sports scenes using the touch shutter

When [Scene Selection] is set to [Sports Action], you can record burst images while touching the monitor.
Shooting continuous bracket images using the touch shutter

The product shoots three images while automatically shifting the exposure from base, to darker, and then to lighter. When
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Bracket], keep touching the monitor until the shooting ends. After the recording you can select the
image you prefer.
Note
The [Touch Shutter] function is unavailable in the following situations:
During viewfinder shooting
When the shooting mode is set to [Movie]
When the shooting mode is set to [High Frame Rate]
During [Smile Shutter] mode
When [Focus Mode] is [Manual Focus]
When [Focus Area] is [Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Expand Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
While using the [ Clear Image Zoom]
Related Topic
515
Touch Operation
516
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. This function is available
when [Focus Area] is set to a parameter other than [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] beforehand.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Focus].
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode
You can specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. After touching the monitor and specifying a
position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
1. Touch the monitor.

When shooting with the monitor, touch the position where you want to focus.
When shooting with the viewfinder, you can move the position of the focus by touching and dragging on the
monitor while looking through the viewfinder.
To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch or press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the
monitor, and press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the viewfinder.
2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode (spot focus)
The camera will focus on the touched subject. Spot focus is not available when shooting with the viewfinder.
1. Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.
When you touch the subject, the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus and the focus can be adjusted
using the control ring.
To cancel spot focus, touch or press the center of the control wheel.
Hint
In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible
Spot], the focusing frame can be moved using touch operations.
When the [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.
Note
517
The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
When using the digital zoom
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
518
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image and movie recording modes.
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] in advance.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Tracking].
2 Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.

Tracking will start.
When shooting with the viewfinder, you can use the touch pad to select a subject you want to track.

Hint
To cancel tracking, touch or press the center of the control wheel.
Note
[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:
When [Scene Selection] is [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur].
When shooting movies with [ Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p].
When [ SteadyShot] is set to [Intelligent Active] in the movie mode.
When shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom
When using [Smart Telecon.]
When [Subject Detection] under [Face/Eye AF Set.] is set to [Animal]
Related Topic
Touch Operation
519
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
MOVIE Button
Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [MOVIE Button] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Always:
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode. (except when the mode dial is set to (High
Frame Rate).)
Movie Mode Only:
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [ Movie] mode.
520
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Wheel Lock
You can set whether or not to lock the control wheel when you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Wheel Lock] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Lock:
Locks the control wheel.
Unlock:
Does not lock the control wheel even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
Hint
You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.
Note
When [ AF Area Registration] is set to [On], [Wheel Lock] is fixed to [Unlock].
Related Topic
521
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Audio signals
Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:all:
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
On:Shutter Only:
Only the shutter sound is produced.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.
Note
If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.
522
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image.
1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Write Date] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Records a shooting date.
Off:
Does not record a shooting date.
Note
If you shoot images with the date once, you cannot delete the date from the images later.
The dates are doubly printed if you set the product to print dates when printing the images using PCs or printers.
The recorded time of the image cannot be superimposed on the image.
[ Write Date] is not available for RAW images.
523
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can transfer still images, XAVC S movies, or high-frame-rate movies to a smartphone and view them. The
application Imaging Edge Mobile must be installed on your smartphone.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Send to Smartphone] → desired setting.
If you press the (Send to Smartphone) button in playback mode, the setting screen for [Send to
Smartphone] will appear.
2 If the product is ready for the transfer, the information screen appears on the product. Connect the
smartphone and the product using that information.
The setting method for connecting the smartphone and the product varies depending on the smartphone.
Menu item details

Select on This Device:
Selects an image on the product to be transferred to the smartphone.
(1) Select from among [This Image], [All with this date] or [Multiple Images].
The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.
(2) If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →
[Enter].
Select on Smartphone:
Displays all images recorded on the product’s memory card on the smartphone.
Note
You can only transfer images that are saved on the camera's memory card.
For Android smartphone
For iPhone/iPad
Select Imaging Edge Mobile in the setting menu, and change the image size by [Copy Image Size].
524
Depending on the format of the still image, movie, or high-frame-rate movie, it may not be possible to play it back on a
smartphone.
This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] with a device that has permission to connect. If you
want to change the device that is permitted to connect to the product, reset the connection information by following these steps.
MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must register the
smartphone again.
Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Airplane Mode
525
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When transferring XAVC S video to a smartphone with [Send to Smartphone], you can set whether to transfer the low-
bit-rate proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [ Sending Target] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Proxy Only:
Transfers only proxy movies.
Original Only:
Transfers only original movies.
Proxy & Original:
Transfers both proxy and original movies.
Note
Related Topic
Proxy Recording
526
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Send to Computer
You can transfer images stored in the product to a computer connected to a wireless access point or wireless broadband
router and easily make backup copies using this operation. Before starting this operation, install PlayMemories Home on
your computer and register the access point on the product.
1 Start your computer.
2 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Computer].
Note
Depending on the application settings of your computer, the product will turn off after saving the images to your computer.
You can transfer images from the product to only one computer at a time.
If you want to transfer images to another computer, connect the product and the computer via a USB connection and follow the
instructions in PlayMemories Home.
Proxy movies cannot be transferred.
Related Topic
527
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
View on TV
You can view images on a network-enabled TV by transferring them from the product without connecting the product and
TV with a cable. For some TVs, you may need to perform operations on the TV. For details, refer to the operating
1 MENU → (Network) → [View on TV] → desired device to be connected.
2 When you want to play back images using slideshow, press the center of the control wheel.
To display the next/previous image manually, press the right/left sides of the control wheel.
To change the device to be connected, press the down side of the control wheel, then select [Device list].
Slideshow settings
You can change the slideshow settings by pressing the down side of the control wheel.
Playback Selection:
Selects the group of images to be shown.
Folder View(Still):
Selects from [All] and [All in Folder].
Date View:
Selects from [All] and [All in Date Rng.].
Interval:
Selects from [Short] and [Long].
Effects*:
Selects from [On] and [Off].
Playback Image Size:
Selects from [HD] and [4K].
* The settings are effective only for BRAVIA TV which is compatible with the functions.
Note
You can use this function on a TV that supports DLNA renderer.
You can view images on a Wi-Fi Direct-enabled TV or network-enabled TV (including wired network-enabled TVs).
If you connect TV and this product and do not use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to register your access point first.
Displaying the images on the TV may take time.
Movies cannot be shown on a TV via Wi-Fi. Use an HDMI cable (sold separately).
When [Display as Group] is set to [On], only the first image of the group is transferred to the TV.
528
Related Topic
529
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Sets the condition for connecting the camera to a smartphone.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Ctrl w/ Smartphone:
Sets whether to connect the camera and a smartphone using Wi-Fi. ([On]/[Off])
Connection:
Displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.
Always Connected:
Sets whether to keep the camera connected to a smartphone. If this item is set to [On], once you connect the camera to
a smartphone, it will remain connected to the smartphone at all times. If it is set to [Off], the camera will connect to a
smartphone only when the connection procedure is performed.
Note
If [Always Connected] is set to [On], the power consumption will be greater than when it is set to [Off].
Related Topic
530
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Airplane Mode
When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.
If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.
531
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.
1 MENU → (Network) →[Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push].
2 Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.
Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-
Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is set to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].
For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or contact
the administrator of the access point.
A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such
as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,
change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.
Related Topic
532
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,
security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point
operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Access Point Set.].
2 Select the access point you want to register.
When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access
point.
If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.
3 Input the password, and select [OK].
Access points without the mark do not require a password.
4 Select [OK].
Other setting items

Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.
WPS PIN:
Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.
Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].
IP Address Setting:
533
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway:
If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.
Note
To give the registered access point priority in the future, set [Priority Connection] to [On].
Related Topic
534
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Displays the Wi-Fi MAC address of this product.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Disp MAC Address].
535
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
This product shares connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection] under [Ctrl w/ Smartphone]
with devices that have permission to connect. If you want to change the devices that are permitted to connect, reset the
connection information.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].
Note
If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the
smartphone again.
Related Topic
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
536
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Bluetooth Settings
Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander via a Bluetooth
connection.
If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information link function, refer to “Location
Info. Link Set..”
If you want to perform pairing in order to use a Bluetooth remote commander, refer to “Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl.”
1 MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Bluetooth Function (On/Off):
Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera.
Pairing:
Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.
Disp Device Address:
Displays the BD address of the camera.
Related Topic
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
537
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can use the application Imaging Edge Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected
with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting
images.
Preparation in advance
To use the location information linking function of the camera, the application Imaging Edge Mobile is required.
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed on the top page of Imaging Edge Mobile, you need to perform the
following steps beforehand.
1. Install Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone.
You can install Imaging Edge Mobile from the application store of your smartphone. If you have already installed
the application, update it to the latest version.
2. Transfer a pre-recorded image to your smartphone using the [Send to Smartphone] function of the camera.
After you transfer an image recorded using the camera to your smartphone, “Location Information Linkage” will
appear on the top page of the application.
Operating procedure
: Operations performed on the smartphone

: Operations performed on the camera
1. : Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen. In steps 2 to 7, the pairing
operation is performed using the camera and the application Imaging Edge Mobile.
If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing
and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application
Imaging Edge Mobile.
2. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].
3. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].
4. : Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed, follow the steps in “Preparation in advance” above.
5. : Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge
Mobile.
6. : Follow the instructions on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge Mobile, and then
select your camera from the list.
7. : Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera.
Pairing of the camera and Imaging Edge Mobile is complete.
538
8. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Location Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].
(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information
obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.
Menu item details

Location Info. Link:
Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Icons displayed when obtaining the location information

(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.
(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not established.
Hint
Location information can be linked when Imaging Edge Mobile is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is
off. However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the
camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Imaging Edge Mobile screen on the
smartphone.
When Imaging Edge Mobile is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Imaging Edge Mobile to resume
location information linking.
If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile.
For more detailed instructions, refer to the following support page.

https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/
Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To perform pairing again, delete the pairing information for
the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile before trying again.
The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is disconnected.
The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.
If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function of
the smartphone that is already linked.
paired smartphone.
When pairing the camera and your smartphone, be sure to use the [Location Information Linkage] menu on Imaging Edge Mobile.
To use the location information linkage function, set [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [Off].
The communication distance for Bluetooth or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.
Supported smartphones
Refer to the support page for the latest information.
https://www.sony.net/iem/
539
For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.
Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Bluetooth Settings
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
540
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth remote commander RMT-P1BT (sold separately). Select MENU →
(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] in advance. Refer to the instruction manual for the
Bluetooth remote commander as well.
1 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].
If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 2 will
appear.
2 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] to display the screen for
pairing.
3 On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.
4 On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.
Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing
the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by
setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].
Menu item details

On:
Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Off:
Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Hint
The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.
If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing
again.
paired Bluetooth remote commander.
You cannot use the function for linking location information with a smartphone while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].
While [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On], the camera will not switch to the power-saving mode. Change the setting to [Off] when
you are done using the Bluetooth remote commander.
541
Related Topic
Bluetooth Settings
542
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Edit Device Name
You can change the device name for the Wi-Fi Direct or Bluetooth connection.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Edit Device Name].
2 Select the input box, then input the device name→[OK].
Related Topic
543
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Reset Network Set.
Resets all the network settings to default settings.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Reset Network Set.] → [Enter].
544
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The mark is displayed on protected images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Protect] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The mark is displayed in the check
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:

Protects all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images taken on the selected date.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.
Protects all the images in the selected group.
Cancel All in This Group:
Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.
Hint
If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], you can protect
images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within
Note
545
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.
1 Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU → (Playback) → [Rotate].
The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.
Note
Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor or viewfinder of the camera.
You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.
When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the
software.
546
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to
be deleted beforehand.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The mark is displayed in the check
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:

Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images taken on the selected date.
All Other Than This Img.:
Deletes all images in the group except the selection.
Deletes all images in the selected group.
Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.
To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:
(Image Index) lever → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date using the
top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within
Note
Related Topic
Format
547
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Rating
You can assign ratings to recorded images on a scale from to to make it easier to find images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Rating].
The image rating selection screen will appear.
2 Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and
then press the center.
3 Select the number of (Rating) by pressing the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center.
4 Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.
Hint
You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [
Custom Key] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a rating. The
number of (Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.
Note
You can assign ratings to still images only.
Related Topic
548
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the available number of when rating images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating] using [
Custom Key].
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].
2 Add a mark to the number of that you want to activate.
You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.
Related Topic
Rating
549
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to print out later. The (print order)
icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to “Digital Print Order Format.”
DPOF setting will be retained after the image is printed. We recommend that you cancel this setting after printing.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Specify Printing] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Selects images to order printing.
(1) Select an image and press the center of the control wheel. The mark is displayed in the check box. To cancel
the selection, press the center again and delete the mark.
(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images. To select all the images from a certain date or in a certain folder, select the
check box for the date or folder.
(3) MENU → [OK].
Cancel All:
Clears all DPOF marks.
Print Setting:
Sets whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.
The position or size of the date (inside or outside of the image) may differ depending on the printer.
Note
You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:
RAW images
The number of copies cannot be specified.
Some printers do not support the date print function.
550
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Beauty Effect
Allows you to apply the Beauty Effect to retouch the still image of a person and make it look better, for example, by
retouching it for smoother skin, larger eyes, and whiter teeth. You can set the effects from level 1 to level 5. An image on
which the Beauty Effect is used is saved as a new file. The original image is retained as it is.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Beauty Effect].
2 Select the face for which you want to use the Beauty Effect.
3 Select the desired effect, and adjust the retouching level using the control wheel.
(Skin Toning):
Adjusts the skin color as you like.
1. Select the base skin color using up/down, and then press the center.
2. Adjust the color tone using up/down.
(Skin Smoothing):
Removes age spots and wrinkles from the skin.
(Shine Removal):
Reduces the look of oily skin. Adjusts the skin color as you like.
(Eye Widening):
Enlarges the eyes of the subject. Adjust the size of the eyes using up/down.
(Teeth Whitening):
Whiten the teeth of the subject. You may not be able to whiten the teeth in some images.
Adjust the whiteness of the teeth using up/down.
To apply two or more effects consecutively using [Beauty Effect], first apply one effect to the image, and then select
another effect using left/right.
Note
You cannot use [Beauty Effect] for the following images:
Panoramic images
Movies
RAW images
You cannot use the Beauty Effect on an extremely small facial image.
To use the Beauty Effect on two or more faces, select the same image again after the effect has been applied once, and then use
the effect on another face.
The [Beauty Effect] may not work properly for some images.
551
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Photo Capture
Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback
to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.
1 Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.
2 MENU → (Playback) → [Photo Capture].
3 Play back the movie and pause it.
4 Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and
displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.
5 Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.
The scene is saved as a still image.
Related Topic
Shooting movies
Playing back movies
552
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.
1 Display the image you want to enlarge, and slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the T side.
Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side to adjust the zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location
information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.
2 Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.
3 Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.
Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.
You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [
Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].
Note
You cannot enlarge movies.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
553
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard. Mag.:
Displays an image with the standard magnification.
Previous Mag.:
Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after exiting the playback
zoom mode.
Related Topic
554
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Focused Position:
Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.
Center:
Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.
Related Topic
555
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Motion Interval ADJ
You can adjust the interval of the tracking of the subject’s motion.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Motion Interval ADJ] → desired setting.
Related Topic
Motion Shot Video
556
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge
(Viewer). You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Cont. PB for Interval].
2 Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.
Hint
On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.
You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.
You can change the playback speed by turning the control wheel during playback. You can also change the playback speed by
selecting MENU → (Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval].
You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.
Related Topic
Imaging Edge
557
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. PB for Interval].
1 MENU → (Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval] → desired setting.
Hint
You can also change the playback speed by turning the control wheel during [Cont. PB for Interval].
Related Topic
558
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Automatically plays back images continuously.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Slide Show] → desired setting.
2 Select [Enter].
Menu item details

Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow
when all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.
Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.
You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].
559
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the View Mode (image display method).
1 MENU → (Playback) → [View Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Date View:
Displays the images by date.
Folder View(Still):
Displays only still images.
AVCHD View:
Displays only AVCHD-format movies.
XAVC S HD View:
Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.
XAVC S 4K View:
Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.
560
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.
1 Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side while the image is being played back.
2 Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control
wheel.
To change the number of images to be displayed

MENU → (Playback) → [Image Index] → desired setting.
Menu item details

9 Images/25 Images
To return to single-image playback

Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.
To display a desired image quickly

Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the
control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing
the center. In addition, you can switch View Mode by selecting an icon.
Related Topic
561
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Display as Group
Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting as a group.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Display as Group] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays images as a group.
Off:
Does not display images as a group.
Hint
The following images are grouped.
Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter
button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)
Images shot with [ Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)
Images shot with [Single Burst Shoot.]
On the image index screen, is displayed over the group.
Note
Images can be grouped and displayed only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. When it is not set to [Date View], images
cannot be grouped and displayed, even if [Display as Group] is set to [On].
If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Single Burst Shoot.
562
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically by detecting the orientation of the camera.
Manual:
Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image
will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Images are always displayed horizontally.
Note
Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera during movie playback.
Related Topic
563
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Monitor Brightness
Adjust the brightness of the screen.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.
Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.
The monitor brightness cannot be adjusted in the following situations. The maximum brightness will be [±0].
The monitor brightness is locked at [-2] when shooting a movie using the Wi-Fi functions.
The monitor brightness is locked at [-2] when an overheating warning is displayed.
564
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Viewfinder Bright.
When using the viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder according to the surrounding
environment.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Viewfinder Bright.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
Adjusts the brightness automatically.
Manual:
Selects the brightness of the viewfinder within the range of –2 to +2.
Note
The viewfinder brightness cannot be adjusted in the following situations. The maximum brightness will be [±0].
565
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Finder Color Temp.
Adjusts the color temperature of the electronic viewfinder.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder Color Temp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

-2 to +2:
When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when you select “+,” it changes to a colder
color.
566
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Gamma Disp. Assist
Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range.
Movies with the HLG gamma are assumed to be displayed on HDR-compatible monitors. They are therefore displayed in
low contrast during shooting, and may be difficult to monitor. However, you can use the [Gamma Disp. Assist] function to
reproduce contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when
playing back movies on the camera's monitor/viewfinder.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Gamma Disp. Assist].
2 Select the desired setting using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not apply [Gamma Disp. Assist].
Auto:
Displays movies with an [S-Log2→709(800%)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [S-Log2], and with an [S-
Log3→709(800%)] effect when the gamma is set to [S-Log3]. Displays movies with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect when the
gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3], and [Color Mode] is set to [BT.2020].
Displays movies with an [HLG(709)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3],
and [Color Mode] is set to [709].
S-Log2→709(800%):
S-Log3→709(800%):
HLG(BT.2020):
when movies are displayed on an [HLG(BT.2020)] compatible monitor.
HLG(709):
when movies are displayed on an [HLG(709)] compatible monitor.
Note
Movies in the XAVC S 4K or XAVC S HD format with the [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] gamma are displayed with an
[HLG(BT.2020)] effect or [HLG(709)] effect depending on the movie’s gamma value and color mode. In other situations, movies
are displayed according to the gamma setting and color mode setting in [Picture Profile].
[Gamma Disp. Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the camera.
Related Topic
Picture Profile
567
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Volume Settings
Sets the sound volume for movie playback.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.
Adjusting the volume during playback

Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the
volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.
568
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Tile Menu
Selects whether to always display the first screen of the menu when you press the MENU button.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Tile Menu] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Always displays the first screen of the menu (Tile Menu).
Off:
Deactivates the Tile Menu display.
569
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Mode Dial Guide
You can display the description of a shooting mode when you turn the mode dial and change the settings available for
that shooting mode.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Mode Dial Guide] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the Mode Dial Guide.
Off:
Does not display the Mode Dial Guide.
570
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Delete confirm.
You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.
571
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Display Quality
You can change the display quality.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Quality] → desired setting.
Menu item details

High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.
Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the setting may become locked to [Standard].
572
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Auto Monitor OFF
The camera automatically switches to the power-saving mode if you do not operate the camera for a certain period of
time in the still-image shooting mode. This function is useful for reducing the power consumption.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Auto Monitor OFF] → desired setting
Menu item details

Off:
The camera does not switch to the power-saving mode automatically.
2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec:
The camera switches to the power-saving mode and the monitor turns off if a certain number of seconds elapses without
any operations.
When [5 Sec] or [10 Sec] is selected, the monitor darkens two seconds before the end of the duration you have set.
Note
[Auto Monitor OFF] does not activate in the following situations:
When the monitor is flipped up by approximately 180 degrees
When the power-saving function is not activated
573
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set the time by which the power goes off automatically.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.
Menu item details

30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min
Note
The power save function is deactivated in the following situations:
While power is being supplied via USB
While playing back slideshows
While recording movies
While connected to a computer or TV
When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]
574
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to turn the power off when the viewfinder is stowed.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Function for VF close] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Power OFF:
Turns the power off when the viewfinder is stowed.
Not Power OFF:
Does not turn the power off when the viewfinder is stowed.
575
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],
you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard:
Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.
High:
Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].
Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.
Continuous recording time for movies when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording is as follows when the camera starts recording with the
default settings after the power has been turned off for a while. The following values indicate the continuous time from
when the camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.

Note
Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable
time for movies may not change.
Related Topic
576
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
NTSC/PAL Selector
Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]
Note
If you insert a memory card that has previously been formatted with a different video system, a message telling you that you must
reformat the card will appear.
If you want to record using another system, re-format the memory card or use another memory card.
When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one, a message "Running on NTSC." or
"Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.
577
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Touch Operation
Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Activates the touch operation.
Off:
Deactivates the touch operation.
Related Topic
Touch Pad Settings
Touch Panel/Pad
578
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as "touch panel operations," and touch operations when
shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as "touch pad operations." You can select whether to activate touch panel
operations or touch pad operations.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Panel/Pad] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Touch Panel+Pad:
Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with
the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only:
Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only:
Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
579
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Touch Pad Settings
You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Pad Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Operation in Vertical Orientation :
Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous
operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
Touch Position Mode:
Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen ([Absolute Position]), or move the
focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement ([Relative
Position]).
Operation Area:
Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations
caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
About Touch Positioning Mode
Selecting [Absolute Position] lets you move the focusing frame to a distant position more quickly because you can
directly specify the position of the focusing frame with touch operations.
Selecting [Relative Position] lets you operate the touch pad from wherever is easiest, without having to move your finger
over a wide area.
Hint
In touch pad operations when [Touch Position Mode] is set to [Absolute Position], the area set in [Operation Area] is treated as
the entire screen.
580
Related Topic
Touch Operation
581
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Demo Mode
The [Demo Mode] function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration), when the
camera has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select [Off].
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Demo Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The movie playback demonstration starts automatically if the product is not operated for about one minute. Only
protected AVCHD movies can be played back.
Set the view mode to [AVCHD View], and protect the movie file with the oldest recorded date and time.
Off:
Does not show the demonstration.
Note
You can set this item only when the product is powered by the AC Adaptor (supplied).
When there is no protected AVCHD movies on the memory card, you cannot select [On].
582
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
TC/UB Settings
The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → setting value you want to change.
Menu item details

TC/UB Disp. Setting:
Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset:
Sets the time code.
UB Preset:
Sets the user bit.
TC Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
How to set the time code (TC Preset)

The time code can be set between the following range.
* When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames.
Note
When you tilt the monitor to shoot a self-portrait, the time code and user bit will not be displayed.
How to reset the time code

2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00:00).
You can also reset the time code (00:00:00:00) using the RMT-VP1K remote commander (sold separately).
How to set the user bit (UB Preset)

How to reset the user bit
583
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).
How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format *1)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format].
DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame*2 format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
*1 Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*2 The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods
of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make
the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time
code without this correction is called non-drop frame.
The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.
How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run].
Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from
the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.
The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in
[Rec Run] mode.
When the recording format is changed.
When the recording medium is removed.
How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make].
Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code
consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.
584
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately),
you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p:
Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
Note
If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either [1080i], [1080p] or [2160p/1080p], based on which
TV is to be connected.
585
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [ Record Setting] is set to [24p 50M], [24p 60M]
or [24p 100M].
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → [1080p] or [2160p/1080p].
2 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ 24p/60p Output] → desired setting.
Menu item details

60p:
24p:
Note
Steps 1 and 2 can be set in either order.
Related Topic
586
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable
(sold separately).
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s
monitor.
Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on
the camera’s monitor.
Note
When the camera is connected to an HDMI device while [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], the setting switches to [Off].
587
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal via the HDMI terminal when outputting
the signal to other professional-use devices.
This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The product sends the time code information
as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to the digital data to
recognize the time data.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ TC Output] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Time code is output to other devices.
Off:
Time code is not output to other devices.
Note
588
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the recorder/player to start/stop
recording using the camera.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ REC Control] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The camera can send a recording command to an external recorder/player.
The camera is sending a recording command to an external recorder/player.
Off:
The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to start/stop recording.
Note
Available for external recorders/players compatible with [ REC Control].
When you use the [ REC Control] function, set the shooting mode to (Movie).
When [ TC Output] is set to [Off], you cannot use the [ REC Control] function.
Even when is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of the
recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.
589
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can
operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.
2 Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.
The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.
3 Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.
4 Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.
Menu item details

On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.
[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also, the SYNC MENU operation differs depending on
the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to another
manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].
590
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to 4K-compatible external
recording/playback devices, etc.
1 Turn the mode dial to (movie).
2 Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.
3 MENU → (Setup) → [ 4K Output Select] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Memory Card+HDMI:
Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(30p):
HDMI Only(24p):
HDMI Only(25p) *:
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.
Note
This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to a 4K-compatible device.
When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, [HDMI Info. Display] will temporarily be set to [Off].
When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, the counter does not move forward (the actual recording
time is not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recording/playback device.
When shooting 4K movies using the setting [Memory Card+HDMI], the movies will not be output to a device connected by HDMI
cable if you simultaneously record a proxy movie. If you want to perform HDMI output, set [ Proxy Recording] to [Off]. (In this
case, if you set [ Record Setting] to other values except [24p], the image will not be displayed on the screen of the camera).
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and the camera is connected via HDMI, the following functions are partially
restricted.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF]
[Face Priority in Multi Metering]
Tracking function
Related Topic
File Format (movie)
591
592
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
USB Connection
Selects the USB connection method when this product is connected to a computer, etc.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off] beforehand.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Connection] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be
connected. Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are
enabled for use.
Mass Storage:
Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or
Windows 10 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
PC Remote:
Uses Imaging Edge (Remote) to control the product from a computer, including such functions as shooting and storing
images on the computer.
Note
It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].
Related Topic
593
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
USB LUN Setting
Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.
594
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
USB Power Supply
Sets whether to supply power via the micro USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Power is supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc. If you use
the supplied AC Adaptor, power will be supplied even when [Off] is selected.
Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable

The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.
A checkmark indicates that the operation is available, and “―” indicates that the operation is unavailable.
Operation Available / Unavailable
Shooting images
Playing back images
Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth connections
Charging a battery pack ―
Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted ―
Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.
595
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting
is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.
the computer.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [PC Remote Settings] → [Still Img. Save Dest.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

PC Only:
Saves still images only on the computer.
PC+Camera:
Saves still images on the computer and the camera.
Camera Only :
Saves still images only on the camera.
Note
If you insert a memory card that is not recordable, you cannot shoot still images even if you select [Camera Only] or
[PC+Camera].
If you select [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera] and you have not inserted a memory card into the camera, you cannot release the
shutter even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].
While you are playing back still images on the camera, you cannot shoot using PC Remote.
Related Topic
USB Connection
Release w/o Card
596
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer in PC Remote shooting.
When shooting still images using PC Remote, the application on the computer does not display the image until the
image has been completely transferred. When performing RAW+JPEG shooting, you can accelerate the display
processing speed by transferring only JPEG images instead of transferring both RAW and JPEG images.
the computer.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [PC Remote Settings] → [RAW+J PC Save Img] → desired setting.
Menu item details

RAW & JPEG:
Transfers both RAW and JPEG files to the computer.
JPEG Only:
Transfers only JPEG files to the computer.
RAW Only:
Transfers only RAW files to the computer.
Note
[RAW+J PC Save Img] can be set only when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG].
Related Topic
USB Connection
597
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Language
Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [ Language] → desired language.
598
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Date/Time Setup
The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time or when the internal
rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when setting the date and time after the first time.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
Date Format:
Selects the date and time display format.
Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more
with the power off.
If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your
service facility.
599
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Area Setting
Sets the area where you are using the product.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area Setting] → desired area.
600
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Copyright Info
Writes copyright information onto the still images.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.
2 When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the screen. Enter your
desired name.
Menu item details

Write Copyright Info:
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], an icon will appear on the shooting screen.
Set Photographer:
Sets the photographer name.
Set Copyright:
Sets the copyright holder name.
Disp. Copyright Info:
Displays the current copyright information.
Note
You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright]. You can enter up to 46
letters.
A icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.
In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns
before lending out or handing over your camera.
Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].
Related Topic
601
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Format
When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the
camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory
card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Format].
Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).
The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.
Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable
depending on the format type.
It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.
You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.
602
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sets file names for still images to be shot, and specifies folders for storing the shot still images.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [ File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.
[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.
Set File Name:
You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
Select REC Folder:
Selects the folder in which images are stored when [Folder Name] is set to [Standard Form].
New Folder:
Creates a new folder for still images to be stored. A new folder numbered with the previous folder number +1 will be
created.
Folder Name:
You can set how folder names are assigned.
[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + MSDCF”.
Example: 100MSDCF
[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.
Example: 10090405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2019)
Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first
character.
The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.
When [Folder Name] is set to [Date Form], you cannot select the folder where files are stored.
A new folder may be automatically created if you shoot images using a memory card that has been used in another device.
Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be automatically
created.
603
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [ File Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.
[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
Series Counter Reset:
Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].
File Name Format:
You can set the format for movie file names.
[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001
[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”
[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”
[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”
Title Name Settings:
You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].
Note
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for [Title Name Settings]. Up to 37 characters can be entered.
Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is made.
[ File Settings] does not apply to AVCHD movies.
You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.
If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].
If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”
604
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Recover Image DB
If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images
on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If these problems happen, repair the file using [Recover
Image DB].
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Recover Image DB] → [Enter].
Note
If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.
Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [Recover Image DB].
605
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Display Media Info.
Displays the recordable time of movies for the inserted memory card. Also displays the number of recordable still images
for the inserted memory card.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Media Info.].
606
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Version
Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,
etc.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Version].
Note
Updating can be performed only when the battery level is (3 remaining battery bars) or more. Use a sufficiently charged
battery pack.
607
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Setting Reset
Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.
Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.
Settings of [Picture Profile] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.
608
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Add Item
You can register the desired menu items to (My Menu) under MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Add Item].
2 Select an item that you want to add to (My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control
wheel.
Hint
You can add up to 30 items to (My Menu).
Note
You cannot add the following items to (My Menu).
Any item under MENU → (Playback)
[View on TV]
Related Topic
Sort Item
Delete Item
Using MENU items
609
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Sort Item
You can rearrange the menu items added to (My Menu) under MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Sort Item].
2 Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
Related Topic
Add Item
610
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Delete Item
You can delete menu items added to (My Menu) of MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Item].
2 Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center to delete the selected item.
Hint
To delete all the items on a page, select MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Page].
You can delete all the items added to (My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].
Related Topic
Delete Page
Delete All
Add Item
611
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Delete Page
You can delete all the menu items added to a page under (My Menu) in MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Page].
2 Select a page that you want to delete using the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel to delete the items.
Related Topic
Add Item
Delete All
612
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Delete All
You can delete all the menu items added to (My Menu) in MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].
2 Select [OK].
Related Topic
Add Item
Delete Page
613
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.
Off:
The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.
Related Topic
Add Item
614
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Precautions
Refer also to “Notes on use” in the Startup Guide (supplied) for this product.
On the data specifications described in this manual
The data on performance and specifications in this manual are based on an ordinary ambient temperature of 25ºC
(77°F), except where otherwise indicated.
For the battery pack, the data are based on a battery pack that was fully charged until the charge lamp turned off.
On operating temperatures
Shooting in extremely cold or hot places that exceed this range is not recommended.
Under high ambient temperatures, the temperature of the camera rises quickly.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the image quality may deteriorate. It is recommended that you wait until
the temperature of the camera drops before continuing to shoot.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the camera may become unable to record movies or the power
may turn off automatically to protect the camera. A message will be displayed on the screen before the power turns
off or you can no longer record movies. In this case, leave the power off and wait until the camera and battery
temperature goes down. If you turn on the power without letting the camera and battery cool sufficiently, the power
may turn off again, or you may still be unable to record movies.
Notes on recording for long periods of time or recording 4K movies
Especially during 4K movie shooting, the recording time may be shorter under low temperature conditions. Warm up the
battery pack or replace it with a new battery.
Notes on playing movies on other devices
XAVC S movies can be played back only on XAVC S-supported devices.
Notes on recording/playback
Before you start recording, make a trial recording to make sure that the camera is working correctly.
Playback of images recorded with your product on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with
other equipment on your product are not guaranteed.
Sony can provide no guarantees in the event of failure to record, or loss of or damage to recorded images or audio
data, due to a malfunction of the camera or recording media, etc. We recommend backing up important data.
Once you format the memory card, all the data recorded on the memory card will be deleted and cannot be restored.
Before formatting, copy the data to a computer or other device.
Backing up memory cards
Data may be corrupted in the following cases. Be sure to back up the data for protection.
When the memory card is removed, the USB cable is disconnected, or the product is turned off in the middle of a
read or write operation.
When the memory card is used in locations subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
Database file error
If you insert a memory card that does not contain an image database file into the product and turn on the power, the
product automatically creates an image database file using some of the memory card’s capacity. The process may
take a long time and you cannot operate the product until the process is completed.
615
If a database file error occurs, export all images to your computer using PlayMemories Home, and then format the
memory card using this product.
Do not use/store the product in the following places
In an extremely hot, cold or humid place

In places such as in a car parked in the sun, the camera body may become deformed and this may cause a
malfunction.
Storing under direct sunlight or near a heater
The camera body may become discolored or deformed, and this may cause a malfunction.
In a location subject to rocking vibration
It may cause malfunctions and an inability to record data. In addition, the recording media may become unusable,
and recorded data may be corrupted.
Near strong magnetic place
In sandy or dusty places
Be careful not to let sand or dust get into the product. This may cause the product to malfunction, and in some cases
this malfunction cannot be repaired.
In places with high humidity
This may cause the lens to mold.
In areas where strong radio waves or radiation are being emitted
Recording and playback may not function correctly.
On moisture condensation
If the product is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may condense inside or outside the
product. This moisture condensation may cause a malfunction of the product.
To prevent moisture condensation when you bring the product directly from a cold to a warm location, first put it in a
plastic bag and seal it to prevent air from entering. Wait for about an hour until the temperature of the product has
reached the ambient temperature.
If moisture condensation occurs, turn off the product and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. Note that
if you attempt to shoot with moisture remaining inside the lens, you will be unable to record clear images.
Precaution on carrying
Do not hold, hit, or apply excessive force to the following parts, if your camera is equipped with them:
The lens part
The movable monitor part
The movable flash part
The movable viewfinder part
Do not carry the camera with the tripod attached. This may cause the tripod socket hole to break.
Do not sit down in a chair or other place with the camera in the back pocket of your trousers or skirt, as this may
cause malfunction or damage the camera.
Notes on handling the product
Before you connect the cable to the terminal, be sure to check the orientation of the terminal. Then, insert the cable
straight. Do not insert or remove the cable forcefully. This may cause the terminal part to break.
The camera uses magnetic parts including magnets. Do not bring objects affected by magnetism, including credit
cards and floppy disks, close to the camera.
The recorded image may be different from the image you monitored before recording.
On storing
For lens-integrated cameras
Always attach the lens cap when you are not using the camera. (Only for models supplied with a lens cap)
For interchangeable-lens cameras
Always attach the lens front cap or body cap when you are not using the camera. To prevent dust or debris from
getting inside the camera, remove dust from the body cap before attaching it to the camera.
If the camera is dirty after use, clean it. Water, sand, dust, salt, etc. left in the camera may cause a malfunction.
616
Notes on using lenses
When using the power zoom lens, be careful not to get your fingers or any other objects caught in the lens. (Only for
models with a power zoom feature or interchangeable lens cameras)
If you must place the camera under a light source such as sunlight, attach the lens cap to the camera. (Only for
models supplied with a lens cap or interchangeable lens cameras)
When you shoot with backlighting, keep the sun sufficiently far away from the angle of view. Otherwise, the sunlight
may enter the focus inside the camera and cause smoke or fire. Even if the sun is slightly away from the angle of
view, it may still cause smoke or fire.
Do not directly expose the lens to beams such as laser beams. That may damage the image sensor and cause the
camera to malfunction.
If the subject is too close, the image may show any dust or fingerprints on the lens. Wipe the lens with a soft cloth,
etc.
Notes on the flash (Only for models with a flash)
Keep your fingers away from the flash. The light-emitting part may get hot.
Remove any dirt from the surface of the flash. Dirt on the surface of the flash may emit smoke or burn due to heat
generated by the emission of light. If there is dirt/dust, clean it off with a soft cloth.
Restore the flash to its original position after using it. Make sure that the flash portion is not sticking up. (Only for
models with a movable flash)
Notes on the Multi Interface Shoe (Only for models with a Multi Interface Shoe)
When attaching or detaching accessories such as an external flash to the Multi Interface Shoe, first turn the power to
OFF. When attaching the accessory, confirm that it is firmly fastened to the camera.
Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltages of 250 V or more or has
the opposite polarity of the camera. It may cause a malfunction.
Notes on the viewfinder and flash (Only for models with a viewfinder or a flash)
Take care that your finger is not in the way when pushing the viewfinder or flash down. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)
If water, dust or sand adheres to the viewfinder or flash unit, it may cause a malfunction. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)
Notes on the viewfinder (Only for models with a viewfinder)
When shooting with the viewfinder, you may experience symptoms such as eyestrain, fatigue, travel sickness, or
nausea. We recommend that you take a break at regular intervals when you are shooting with the viewfinder.
In case you may feel uncomfortable, refrain from using the viewfinder until your condition recovers, and consult your
doctor if necessary.
Do not forcibly push down the viewfinder when the eyepiece is pulled out. It may cause a malfunction. (Only for
models with a movable viewfinder and an eyepiece that can be pulled out)
If you pan the camera while looking into the viewfinder or move your eyes around, the image in the viewfinder may
be distorted or the color of the image may change. This is a characteristic of the lens or display device and is not a
malfunction. When you shoot an image, we recommend that you look at the center area of the viewfinder.
The image may be slightly distorted near the corners of the viewfinder. This is not a malfunction. When you want to
see the full composition with all its details, you can also use the monitor.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
Notes on the monitor
Do not press against the monitor. The monitor may be discolored and that may cause a malfunction.
If the monitor has drops of water or other liquids on it, wipe it with a soft cloth. If the monitor stays wet, the surface of
the monitor may change or deteriorate. This may cause a malfunction.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
On image data compatibility
617
This product conforms with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).
Services and software provided by other companies
Network services, content, and the [operating system and] software of this Product may be subject to individual terms
and conditions and changed, interrupted or discontinued at any time and may require fees, registration and credit card
information.
618
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
On cleaning
Cleaning the lens, finder and flash
Wipe the lens, finder and flash with a soft cloth to remove fingerprints, dust, etc.
Cleaning the lens
Do not use a cleaning solution containing organic solvents, such as thinner, or benzine.
When cleaning the lens surface, remove dust with a commercially available blower. In case of dust that sticks to the
surface, wipe it off with a soft cloth or tissue paper slightly moistened with lens cleaning solution. Wipe in a spiral
pattern from the center to the outside. Do not spray lens cleaning solution directly onto the lens surface.
Cleaning the product surface

Clean the product surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface with a dry cloth. To
prevent damage to the finish or casing:
Do not expose the product to chemical products such as thinner, benzine, alcohol, disposable cloths, insect repellent,
sunscreen or insecticide.
Do not touch the product with any of the above on your hand.
Do not leave the product in contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time.
Cleaning the monitor

If you wipe the monitor firmly using tissue paper, etc., the coating may be scratched.
If the monitor becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, gently remove the dust from the surface, and then clean the
monitor using soft cloth, etc.
619
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
When you insert a memory card into the camera and turn the camera on, the number of images that can be recorded
(should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the screen.
Note
When “0” (the number of recordable images) flashes in orange, the memory card is full. Replace the memory card with another
one, or delete images from the current memory card.
When “NO CARD” flashes in orange, it means no memory card has been inserted. Insert a memory card.
The number of images that can be recorded on a memory card

The table below shows the approximate number of images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this
camera. The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing.
The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.
[ JPEG Image Size]: [L: 20M]

[ Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2] *1
(Units: Images)
JPEG Quality/ File Format 8 GB 32 GB 64 GB 256 GB
Standard 1150 4750 9600 37500
Fine 690 2750 5500 22000
Extra fine 510 2050 4150 16000
RAW & JPEG *2 230 940 1850 7500
RAW 355 1400 2850 11000
*1 When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above. (except when
[RAW] is selected)
*2 [ JPEG Quality] when [RAW & JPEG] is selected: [Fine]
Note
Even if the number of recordable images is higher than 9999 images, “9999” will appear.
The numbers shown are when using a Sony memory card.
620
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
The table below shows the approximate total recording times using a memory card formatted with this camera. The
values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.
The recording times for when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [XAVC S HD] are recording times when
shooting with [ Proxy Recording] set to [Off].
(h (hour), min (minute))
8 GB 32 GB 64 GB 256 GB
XAVC S 4K 30p 100M/25p 100M 8 min 35 min 1 h 15 min 5 h 5 min
XAVC S 4K 30p 60M/25p 60M 10 min 55 min 2h 8 h 5 min
XAVC S 4K 24p 100M*/– 8 min 35 min 1 h 15 min 5 h 5 min
XAVC S 4K 24p 60M*/– 10 min 55 min 2h 8 h 5 min
XAVC S HD 120p 100M/100p 100M 8 min 35 min 1 h 15 min 5 h 5 min
XAVC S HD 120p 60M/100p 60M 10 min 55 min 2h 8 h 5 min
XAVC S HD 60p 50M/50p 50M 15 min 1 h 10 min 2 h 25 min 10 h
XAVC S HD 60p 25M/50p 25M 30 min 2 h 20 min 4 h 50 min 19 h 30 min
XAVC S HD 30p 50M/25p 50M 15 min 1 h 10 min 2 h 25 min 10 h
XAVC S HD 30p 16M/25p 16M 50 min 3 h 40 min 7 h 25 min 29 h 55 min
XAVC S HD 24p 50M*/– 15 min 1 h 10 min 2 h 25 min 10 h
AVCHD 60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX) 40 min 2 h 55 min 6h 24 h 15 min
AVCHD 60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH) 55 min 4 h 5 min 8 h 15 min 33 h 15 min
The duration of time available for movie recording varies depending on the file format/recording settings for movies,
memory card, ambient temperature, Wi-Fi network environment, condition of the camera before you start recording,
and condition of the charging of the battery.
The maximum continuous recording time for a single movie shooting session is approximately 13 hours. When
recording XAVC S 4K or XAVC S HD movies in 120p/ 100p, the amount of time available for continuous recording is
approximately 5 minutes (a product specification limit). However, when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], you
can record movies continuously for over 5 minutes.
Note
The recordable time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit-Rate), which automatically adjusts
image quality depending on the shooting scene. When you record a fast-moving subject, the image is clearer but the recordable
time is shorter because more memory is required for recording. The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting
conditions, the subject or the image quality/size settings.
The times shown are recordable times using a Sony memory card.
621
Notes on continuous movie recording
High-quality movie recording and high-speed continuous shooting require large amounts of power. Therefore, if you
continue to shoot, the temperature inside the camera will rise, especially that of the image sensor. In such cases, the
camera will turn off automatically because the surface of the camera is heated to a high temperature or the high
temperature affects the quality of the images or the internal mechanism of the camera.
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording when the camera records with the default settings after
the power has been turned off for a while is as follows. The values indicate the continuous time from when the
camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.
Auto Power OFF Temp. Standard High
File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K
Ambient temperature: 20°C Approx. 30 Approx. 5 Approx. 30 Approx. 30

(68°F) minutes minutes minutes minutes


The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the temperature, file format/record setting for movies,
Wi-Fi network environment, or condition of the camera before you start recording. If you frequently recompose or
shoot images after the power is turned on, the temperature inside the camera will rise and the recording time
available will be shorter.
If the icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen.
If the camera stops movie recording due to a high temperature, leave it for some time with the power turned off. Start
recording after the temperature inside the camera drops fully.
If you observe the following points, you will be able to record movies for longer periods of time.
Keep the camera out of direct sunlight.
Turn the camera off when it is not being used.
When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size
reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
Related Topic
622
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
You can use the battery charger (sold separately) and the AC Adaptor (supplied) in any country or region where the
power supply is within 100 V to 240 V AC and 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Depending on the country/region, a converting plug adaptor may be needed to connect to a wall outlet (wall socket).
Consult a travel agency, etc., and prepare one in advance.
Note
Do not use an electronic voltage transformer as doing so may cause a malfunction.
623
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
AVCHD format
The AVCHD format was developed for high-definition digital video cameras when recording an HD (High-Definition)
signal using high-efficiency compression coding technology. The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is used to compress video
data, and the Dolby Digital or Linear PCM system is used to compress audio data.
The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is capable of compressing images at higher efficiency than that of the conventional
image compressing format.
As the AVCHD format uses compression coding technology, the picture may be unstable in scenes where the screen,
angle of view, or brightness, etc. change drastically, but this is not a malfunction.
624
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
License
Notes on the License
This product comes with software that are used based on licensing agreements with the owners of that software. Based
on requests by the owners of copyright of these software applications, we have an obligation to inform you of the
following. Licenses (in English) are recorded in the internal memory of your product. Establish a Mass Storage
connection between the product and a computer to read licenses in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A
CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
On GNU GPL/LGPL applied software

The software that is eligible for the following GNU General Public License (hereinafter referred to as “GPL”) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (hereinafter referred to as “LGPL”) are included in the product.
This informs you that you have a right to have access to, modify, and redistribute source code for these software
programs under the conditions of the supplied GPL/LGPL.
Source code is provided on the web.
Use the following URL to download it.
http://oss.sony.net/Products/Linux/
We would prefer you do not contact us about the contents of source code.
625
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Specifications
Camera
[System]
Camera Type
[Image sensor]
Image format
13.2 mm × 8.8 mm (1.0 type), CMOS image sensor
Effective pixel number of camera
Approx. 20 100 000 pixels
Total pixel number of camera
Approx. 21 000 000 pixels
[Lens]
ZEISS Vario-Sonnar T＊
f = 9.0 mm – 72 mm
Angle of view: 84° - 12°30' (35 mm format equivalent: 24 mm - 200 mm)
F2.8 (W) – F4.5 (T)
[SteadyShot]
System
Optical
[Auto focus system]

Detection system
Phase detection system/Contrast detection system
[Flash]
Flash range (ISO sensitivity (Recommended Exposure Index) set to Auto):
Approx. 0.4 m to 5.9 m (1.31 ft. to 19.35 ft.) (W)/Approx. 1.0 m to 3.1 m (3.28 ft. to 10.17 ft.) (T)
[Electronic Viewfinder]
Type
1.0 cm (0.39 type) Electronic Viewfinder
Total number of dots
2 359 296 dots
Frame coverage
100%
Magnification
Approx. 0.59× with 50 mm lens at infinity, –1 m–1
Eye Point
Approx. 20 mm from the eyepiece and approx. 19.2 mm from the eyepiece frame at –1 m–1
Diopter Adjustment
626
–4.0 m–1 to +3.0 m–1
[Monitor]
LCD monitor
7.5 cm (3.0 type) TFT drive, touch panel
Total number of dots
921 600 dots
[Recording format]
File format
JPEG (DCF Ver. 2.0, Exif Ver. 2.31, MPF Baseline) compliant, RAW (Sony ARW 2.3 format)
Movie (XAVC S format)
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 XAVC S ver.1.0 format compliant
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48kHz 16bit)
Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver. 2.0 compatible
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio: Dolby Digital 2ch, equipped with Dolby Digital Stereo Creator
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
[Recording media]
Memory Stick, SD cards
[Input/output terminals]
Multi/Micro USB Terminal*
Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0)
* Supports Micro USB compatible devices.
HDMI
HDMI type D micro jack
(Microphone) terminal
Ø3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
[Power, general]
Rated input
3.6 V , 2.3 W
Operating temperature
0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)
Storage temperature
–20 to 55°C (–4 to 131°F)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (Approx.)
101.6 × 58.1 × 42.8 mm
4 × 2 3/8 × 1 11/16 in.
Mass (Approx.)
302 g (10.7 oz) (including battery pack, SD card)
Microphone
Stereo
Speaker
Monaural
Exif Print
Compatible
DPOF
627
Compatible
PRINT Image Matching III
Compatible
[Wireless LAN]
Supported format
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
Security
WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode
[NFC]
Tag type
NFC Forum Type 3 Tag compliant
[Bluetooth communications]
Bluetooth standard Ver. 4.1
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
AC Adaptor AC-UUD12/AC-UUE12
Rated input
100 – 240 V , 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A
Rated output
5V , 1.5 A
Rechargeable battery pack NP-BX1
Rated voltage
3.6 V
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
628
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Trademarks
Memory Stick and are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.

XAVC S and are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.
AVCHD and AVCHD logotype are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
iPhone and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Blu-ray Disc™ and Blu-ray™ are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance.
Dolby, Dolby Audio and double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google LLC.
Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks or trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States and in other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Sony Corporation is under license.
QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™ or ® marks may not be used in all cases in this
manual.
629
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Troubleshooting
If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.
1 If a message such as “C/E:□□:□□” appears on the screen, refer to the self-diagnosis display.
2 Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then turn on the power.
3 Initialize the settings.
4 Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional information on this product and answers
to frequently asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.
https://www.sony.net/
Related Topic
Setting Reset
630
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
If a code starting with a letter of the alphabet appears, the self-diagnosis function on this product is working. The last two
digits (indicated by □□) will differ depending on the state of this product.
If you cannot solve the problem even after trying the following corrective actions a few times, this product may need
repair. Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
C:32:□□
There is trouble with the product’s hardware. Turn the power off and on again.
C:13:□□
This product cannot read or write data on the memory card. Try turning off and on this product again, or taking out
and inserting the memory card several times.
An unformatted memory card is inserted. Format the memory card.
The inserted memory card cannot be used with this product, or the data is damaged. Insert a new memory card.
E:61:□□
E:62:□□
E:91:□□
A product malfunction has occurred. Initialize this product, then turn the power on again.
E:94:□□
There is a malfunction when writing or deleting data. Repair is required. Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized
Sony service facility. Be prepared to give all numbers in the error code beginning from the E.
631
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Warning messages
Set Area/Date/Time.
Set the area, date and time. If you have not used the product for a long time, charge the internal rechargeable
backup battery.
Unable to use memory card. Format?
The memory card was formatted on a computer and the file format was modified. Select [Enter] and then format the
memory card. You can use the memory card again, however, all previous data in the memory card is erased. It may
take some time to complete the format. If the message still appears, change the memory card.
Memory Card Error
An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Formatting has failed. Format the memory card again.
Unable to read memory card. Reinsert memory card.

The memory card is damaged.
The terminal section of the memory card is dirty.
Memory card locked.
You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch or a delete-protect switch with the switch set to the LOCK
position. Set the switch to the record position.
Cannot open the shutter since the memory card is not inserted.
No memory card has been inserted.

To release the shutter without inserting a memory card into the camera, set [Release w/o Card] to [Enable]. In this
case, images will not be saved.
This memory card may not be capable of recording and playing normally.
Processing...
When performing noise reduction, the reduction process takes place. You cannot do any further shooting during this
reduction process.
Unable to display.
Images recorded with other products or images modified with a computer may not be displayed.
Processing on the computer such as deletion of the image files may cause inconsistencies in the image database
files. Repair the image database files.
Unable to print.
You tried to mark RAW images with a DPOF mark.
632
Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.
The product has become hot because you have been shooting continuously. Turn the power off and cool the product
and wait until the product is ready to shoot again.
You have been recording images for a long time, the product temperature has risen.
The number of images exceeds that for which date management in a database file by the product is possible.
Unable to register to the database file. Import all the images to a computer using PlayMemories Home and recover
the memory card.
Image DataBase File error
There is something wrong in the Image Database File. Select [Setup] → [Recover Image DB].
System Error
Camera Error. Turn power off then on.
Remove the battery pack, and then re-insert it. If the message appears frequently, consult local authorized Sony
service facility.
Image Database File error. Recover?
You cannot record and play back an AVCHD movie because the Image Database File is damaged. Recover the
Image Database File following the on-screen instructions.
Unable to magnify.
Unable to rotate image.
Images recorded with other products may not be enlarged or rotated.
Cannot create more folders.
A folder in the memory card has the first three digits “999.” You cannot create any more folders on this camera.
Related Topic
Format
633
Help Guide

DSC-RX100M7
Recommended pages
Looking for valuable information, such as essential points on shooting (Tutorials)

This website introduces convenient functions, ways of usage, and setting examples. Refer to the website when you
set up your camera. (Another window will open.)
DSC-RX100M7 accessories compatibility information

This website provides the accessories compatibility information. (Another window will open.)
634

Rx100 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rx100 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rx100 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Help Guide

Digital Still Camera

Looking for valuable information, such as essential points on shooting (Tutorials)

DSC-RX100M7 accessories compatibility information

Names of parts/Icons and indicators

Using the control wheel

Using the control ring

Using MENU items

Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)

How to use the Quick Navi screen

How to use the keyboard

Icons and indicators

List of icons on the monitor

Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

Preparing the camera

Checking the camera and the supplied items

Charging the battery pack

Inserting/removing the battery pack

Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the camera

Charging by connecting to a computer

Battery life and number of recordable images

Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

Notes on the battery pack

Notes on charging the battery pack

Inserting a memory card (sold separately)

Inserting/removing a memory card

Memory cards that can be used

Notes on memory card

Setting language, date and time

Shooting still images

Tracking subject (Tracking function)

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Focus Frame Color

Pre-AF (still image)

AF Illuminator (still image)

AF Area Auto Clear

Disp. cont. AF area

Phase Detect. Area

Circ. of Focus Point

Direct manual focus (DMF)

MF Assist (still image)

Focus Magnif. Time

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

Single Burst Shoot.

Single Burst Self-timer

Indicator during bracket shooting

Taking pictures of yourself by monitoring the screen

Interval Shoot Func.

Using touch functions

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking

Touch Pad Settings

Selecting still image size/image quality

File Format (still image)

JPEG Quality (still image)

JPEG Image Size (still image)

Aspect Ratio (still image)